A Special Place
By Sequoyah Pendor
Warning!
This story contains sexually explicit, erotic events involving alternative
sexualities. Do not read the contents if they will offend you. If accessing
this site causes you to break local laws (village, town, city, county, province,
state, or country, etc.), please leave now or accept the consequences, should
there be
any.
By reading or downloading this file you implicitly declare that you accept
total responsibility for your actions in regard to material intended for
mature, responsible members of society capable of making decisions about
the content of documents they wish to read. You are accessing this story
of your own free volition. You have been warned!
Disclaimer
This is a work of fiction; any coincidence is just that, a coincidence.
Copyright Notice
This story is copyright by the author and the author retains all rights.
You may distribute, copy, or print one copy of this story however you like,
PROVIDED this copyright notice remains intact and you do not change the story
in any way. Also you may not post this story to any website or charge any
fee to anyone to distribute or access this story.
(Parts Thirty-one - Forty)
Part Thirty-one
Luke
Eugene, Larry, Bill, Linda and Matt
each had a subpoena to appear as witnesses at Orie's and his gang's trial
so they probably would not be in school Tuesday. Matt drove Michael, Mary
Kathryn and me to school and hooked up with Eugene so I could keep the Jeep.
Michael and Mary Kathryn had watched
the beginning of the trial during AP American history, but could not prevail
upon their other teachers to allow them to watch it. My teachers felt that
we could find out what happened later, so I didn't know anything. When lunch
came, Eugene, Larry, Bill, Linda and Matt were waiting for us. Jacob McAllister,
who was now a part of the regular lunch crowd, joined us. As soon as everyone
had gotten their lunch, we were all clamoring to find our what had happened
in court. "Well, I'll tell you this, you don't ever want to have to face
Judge Snow, especially if you think you can get her to go easy," Bill laughed.
"Oh, I'm not so sure. I think they
all got off pretty easy compared to what could have happened," Linda said.
"I know, had I been in her shoes, that Orie..."
"Yea, but you would have been out for
revenge, not justice," Matt laughed. "You would have had a sharp knife and
only started with the squirrel grip!" he said as all the males grabbed their
crotch, protecting the family jewels and wincing. "But stop discussing what
you would have done and tell us what happened."
"Well, the three jerks--and Mr. Mason,
I might add--entered into a plea bargain. The three got tried as youthful
offenders," Linda said, "which means if they keep their noses clean their
record will be erased--in ten years. Judge Snow sentenced them to ten years
in the state prison and suspended that sentence on some conditions."
"Yea," Larry said, "They have to serve
six months in the boot camp for youthful offenders beginning as soon as they
can be admitted. Imagine what will happen if Marshall decides to talk to
his Drill Sergeant the way he talked to Ms. Jones? And until they can get
in boot camp, they are in the county jail."
"And the six months is not just six
months," Matt added. "They have to SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETE six months in boot
camp. Don't think Mommy will be able to make life easy for little Orie there."
"And they are not free when they finish
boot camp. They have to give 100 hours to community service under the direction
of the sheriff or his appointed deputy. Can't you just see the sheriff or,
better yet, one of the deputies who came out to rescue us, going easy?" Eugene
laughed. "Plus, when they leave boot camp, they have to enroll in a GED program."
"What's that?" Jacob asked.
"The Graduate Equivalent Diploma program.
It's for people who haven't finished high school. You study and take a series
of tests and if you pass you get a diploma which is supposed to be as good
as a high school diploma," Paula said.
"They have six months to present Judge
Snow with a GED. They also have to complete a course in tolerance approved
by Judge Snow," Eugene said, "And, Michael you'll like this, they must find
gainful employment within two weeks after leaving boot camp AND pay restitution
to you for the posters they destroyed and to me and Bill for damage to our
cars."
"Plus, all three must complete an alcohol
and drug awareness course and Orion has his driving license suspended for
five years," Bill concluded.
"Wow," Jacob said, "doesn't sound easy
to me."
"Judge Snow said if they were convicted
on all the original charges, they would be middle-aged before they saw life
other than through razor wire. So I guess it really was easy."
"And, if they don't break any laws
for ten years, their record will be wiped clean," Matt added.
"And if they do?" Mary Kathryn asked.
"They will have to serve the original
ten years--beginning from the day of their new conviction."
"Wow," Jacob said again.
"What about Mr. Mason?" I asked. "He's
the one who should really have been locked up and the key thrown away."
"He kinda got off light too, I think,"
Bill said. "His lawyer said he wanted to plead guilty to a misdemeanor because,
as he was sure Judge Snow knew and would consider, he was a good teacher
and a community leader and especially of young men. That was a very dumb
thing to do. I could see steam coming out of Judge Snow's ears before the
lawyer finished. She sent his lawyer and the assistant DA outside to come
back with a reasonable plea bargain. She would not allow him to be charged
with a mere misdemeanor. He was finally charged with aiding and abetting
a breaking and entering, destruction of property and something else related
to the fact that as a teacher, he has authority over students so it's kinda
like contributing to the delinquency of a minor even though all six were
over eighteen."
"Anyway, the school system had already
suspended him without pay because of his violation of the anti-discrimination
and bigotry policy. Judge Snow gave him a fifteen year sentence, suspended
all except six months to be spent in the county jail. The state will take
his teaching certificate, but since he could teach in one of the so-called
Christian schools without certification--like Temple of Praise Christian
School--she forbade his teaching in this state in any capacity and he is
not to work with any group of children under eighteen until his suspended
sentence is over. He will be an old man then. Well, he will be working with
some kids under very close supervision. He does have to give 200 hours in
community service to Juvenile Hall. 'I want you to see what happens to children
who lack moral guidance since you have shown you don't know what that is,'
Judge Snow said. His lawyer requested that he be allowed to serve his active
sentence somewhere else so he and his family could leave Concord. She said
he could, so long as she approved it. And THAT was the day in court," Larry
said.
"Frankly, I'm glad that's all behind
us," Eugene said. "But... there's... well, there's still the McBride trial
coming up..." We all looked at Eugene, expecting him to say more, but he
was looking down saying nothing else.
Since I had finished everything except
the final revision of the catalog, I had asked Uncle Michael to meet with
me and Mr. Stephenson last period so we could all three go over it and see
the photos Mr. Stephenson had ready. When I arrived in the art room, Mr.
Stephenson and Uncle Michael were in the office talking. When I came in,
Mr. Stephenson asked me if I was sure Mr. Greywolf was able to make do without
his manager and we all had a good laugh. Mr. Stephenson had taken a copy
of the catalog and done a paste-up of the photos and I was really impressed.
"Mrs. Greywolf sent down a copy she had looked over and there were several
corrections, but nothing major. I made those before I printed out a copy
for the paste up," Mr. Stephenson said.
"Luke, I think this catalog is a fine
piece of work. It is as good as any I have ever seen for an exhibition and
I have seen many. I hope you know it is going to cost a fortune to get it
printed."
"I didn't. I know nothing about that.
The posters we had done for Michael were the only experience I had with printing
and they weren't very expensive."
"That's because they were all done
in a single color. Sure, there were shades of the same color, but that was
done by screening parts of the poster. This catalog will have to be done
on an excellent four color press."
"Well, it's not very nice to say, I
guess, but Millie's paying for it so I don't have to worry. But I bet she
thinks twice before offering to foot the bill for another artist. She gave
me a thousand to spend on supplies and equipment and they took it all and
a bit more. Of course, the bronzes could never have been done without Mr.
Washington's gift and Mr. Dietrich working for free. Man, this is an expensive
exhibition!"
"And worth every penny," Mr. Stephenson
said.
"Luke, I meant to talk with you about
it earlier, but you need to decide which pieces are for sale..."
"I hadn't thought about selling any
of them. It just never occurred to me."
"Well, I can tell you, there will be
art dealers present and they will want to buy many and probably most of your
pieces. Most will be honest and offer you a fair price. Others will not.
Unless you object, I am appointing myself your agent and I will handle any
and all sales. But I will need to know what's for sale and what's not."
"I guess I'll need to think about that,
but I know there's one..."
"And I was thinking about buying that
one myself," Uncle Michael laughed.
Mr. Stephenson was also laughing and
said, "I had thought about making you an offer, but after last Saturday night,
I didn't think I could afford to spend the rest of my life's earnings for
a painting!" And, damn, I blushed.
"Luke, I think you have been hanging
around that Greywolf kid too much!" Uncle Michael laughed. "John, if you
have everything together, I can take it to Millie so she can get on with
getting the printing done.
Mr. Stephenson looked at Uncle Michael
and smiled, then said, "Call me tonight."
"Sure will."
Since everything was done that I had
anything to do with, I decided to go to the band room and see how things
were going there. When I got there, the ensemble was in the middle of something
I had never heard before, but it sounded vaguely familiar. Just when I thought
I might be getting it, Eugene saw me and stopped the group and said, "Hi,
Luke. Like to hear a real rouser?" He lifted his baton and called out a number
and soon the room was filled with sound. It was really wild. Matt hadn't
seen me until Eugene called my name and when he did, he looked kinda funny,
but when Eugene started on the new piece, he gave the school's keyboard all
he had. In fact, the group was going so well none of us heard the final bell.
When the ensemble finished, we realized the bell had rung. Matt, Eugene and
I walked out to the parking lot. "I'm kinda at loose ends, Matt," I said.
"Everything's ready and Uncle Michael just left to take the catalog to Millie.
I don't know what to do."
"Well, you could come with me and listen
to the practice, but we're concentrating on one of my compositions and it's
not for your ears."
"I think I'll see what Larry's up to.
Think you and Eugene might meet us at the falls when you finish?"
"Later maybe. I have an appointment
with the therapist after practice," Eugene said.
"You and Larry?"
"No, just me today. In fact, if you
guys could wait for me, I think I may need to talk with the three of you
after I see her."
"You need to talk, we'll be there.
Matt, I'll take Larry and the Jeep and Mom can bring you home. We'll wait
at the falls for you, Eugene." We all agreed that was a good plan. Matt let
me drive and, when we were out of sight of the school, he proved a Lakota
Korean didn't let little things like a gear shift and four-wheel-drive lever
keep him from getting the kisses he wanted!
When we got to St. Mary's, I called
Mom and asked her to pick up Matt, and Larry and I drove to the falls. The
day was absolutely hot for May so we headed for the falls' cool waters--actually
they were still pretty cold.
Larry and I were lying on a blanket
warming ourselves, after we had been swimming for a while, when Matt joined
us. He immediately stripped off his clothes and we all went swimming, diving
from the lip of the falls, yelling and carrying on like normal teenagers,
I guess--which, of course, we were, but as near high school graduates, we
often took ourselves too seriously.
When we were well chilled again, and
were lying in the sun, Matt said, "Larry, something is really bugging Eugene.
He was super critical last week at practice and again today. Paula asked
him last week if he wasn't concerned with more than the ensemble and he said
yes, but didn't say any more."
"I noticed he acted strange at lunch
today. He made a comment about Rev. McBride and I thought was going to say
more, but he just hung his head."
"We haven't had any secrets from each
other, I thought. Most of our therapy sessions have been together and we
really have worked through a lot of shit. I have in particular, but there
is something bugging him. You're right, but he won't talk about it and I
learned not to mention it. But I'll tell you, he has held me at a distance
since--I think it started last Sunday. I mean really at a distance. An occasional
kiss--very occasional--and when I asked, he says, 'I love you, but this is
something I have to work out.' After what I had done to him, I haven't pushed
him at all. I hope that's why he went to see the therapist today. We were
both scheduled to go, but he asked to go alone."
"Maybe that's why he wanted to talk
to us. Hope we can help him. The kid's hurting," Matt said.
The sun was so warm and we had all
been playing hard so we all three drifted off to sleep. We were awakened
when Eugene came. "Did you cross the canes, Eugene?" Matt asked. Eugene nodded
his head. "Care to swim and then talk, or talk now?"
"Matt, I think a swim might help me
clear my head a bit," he said as he began to shed his clothes. Soon all four
of us were back in the water. We swam until we were all blue-lipped, even
Matt, then got out.
It was getting late and the falls were
shaded so I said "Guys, grab your things--if you have enough to grab," and
laughed as I pointed to cocks which had sought shelter from the cold water,
"and we'll go up top to Lookout Rock. The sun has warmed it all day so we
can thaw out and, besides, the view is great."
"Hey, I remember the view from up there,"
Larry said as he picked up his clothes. As we walked toward the top of the
falls, Matt and I had our arms about each other, but when Larry started to
put his arm around Eugene's waist, Eugene almost seemed to pull away. We
walked in silence and when we got to Lookout Rock, I spread the blanket and
we all sat down; Matt between my legs, leaning against my chest, just where
he was meant to be. Larry had sat down with his legs spread, but Eugene sat
to one side. No-one spoke a word.
Finally, Eugene gave a long, pain-filled
sigh and said, "I guess I may as well get on with it. Can I just talk and
you listen, at least until I finish, then maybe we can talk. I don't know."
All three of us nodded agreement.
Eugene's Story
"Ok, I know I have been acting kinda
strange the last week, ever since we were at the sheriff's office. I didn't
know what to do. I have really been wrestling with a demon and I thought
he might win. I knew I might lose Larry and I couldn't stand the thought
of that. I was also afraid I might go nuts. That would be better. Luke, I
know that desperate feeling when you just wanted to end it all. I really
seriously thought about that. I really did. Millie knew something was wrong
and in her usual subtle way said to me, 'Son, I know something's eating at
you. If you want to talk about it, I'm here. If you want extra sessions with
your therapist, schedule them, but for God's sake, don't do anything foolish.
I can't stand seeing you being eaten alive.' I hugged her and told her I
would see the therapist, but I went with Larry and that wasn't going to do
any good."
"Then I realized things were really
getting out of hand, Matt, when you and Paula pointed out that I had been
harsh on the chorus and offered to help. I still didn't do anything except
allow my demon to chew at my guts. I was having nightmares when I went to
sleep and staying awake as long as possible because of them. I was becoming
a physical as well as a mental wreck. And, you, my beloved Larry, I was shoving
away and crying inside when I did it. I told myself I'd have to get used
to not having you." When I said that, Larry reached out and placed his hand
on mine and I didn't jerk away even though I felt I should. "Sunday night
I sat in the jacuzzi, trying to relax, hoping I could then sleep without
nightmares. I had bought some benadryhl and when Millie asked about it, I
told her it was for allergies, but it was really to help me get to sleep.
I'd take two or three, then wished I hadn't because I feared the nightmares.
Anyway, Sunday night I took four, and spent some time in the jacuzzi getting
really sleepy. When I had dried off, I flopped in bed, really out of it."
"Sometime early in the morning, the
nightmares started. I finally waked up, soaking wet with sweat and crying
my eyes out. I got up, tossed down some--I'm not sure how many--pills and
climbed into the jacuzzi. I turned the water temperature up so I could really
get relaxed and maybe get to sleep again without nightmares. I guess I just
passed out because I slipped under the water. I was going to drown if I didn't
do something, but I really wanted just to slip into oblivion. But then I
thought of Larry and all of you and what my death would do to my friends
who had stood by me..." Larry was now holding my hand and crying softly.
I started to squeeze his hand, then didn't, then realized he was my world
and what I was doing to him, so I squeezed it lightly. "I started struggling
to get out and finally got my head above the water, but that was all I could
do. I was so drunk from the pills and warm water, I was too weak to crawl
out. I knew that if I allowed myself to go to sleep, I would drown."
"Then all my rage, all my self-loathing,
all my fears just came to the top in horrible scream after scream. You may
remember Millie said her room was in the other wing of the house and our
noise would upset the neighbors before she heard it? Well, fortunately, she
was wrong. Actually, she says she just knew I needed her. In any event, I
was screaming and screaming as I slipped deeper and deeper in the tub, still
struggling to get out, but growing weaker. Millie practically burst the door
down when she came rushing in. She grabbed me under the armpits and yanked
me out of the tub. Don't ever think my mama is a weakling! She flopped me
out of the tub and on the floor as if I was nothing. She called her doctor
and I heard her yell into the phone, 'Hell yes I know what time it is! Why
do you think I called you at home?' She saw the benadryhl bottle, looked
at me and I nodded. Well, she got me up, made me throw up then started me
walking--not very well. In fact, she was more or less dragging me. When the
doctor came, he made me throw up again and then gave me something and told
Millie I'd be all right. 'Probably a little drunk tomorrow, but ok.' Then
he said to me, 'Son, put that bottle away so you can't get it at night. More
people overdose on medicine because they are sleepy when they take a dose
and take too much. But you'll be ok'."
He left and Millie said, 'Son, that
wasn't an accident, was it?' I started crying and told her it was and it
wasn't. I told her I hadn't been able to sleep without nightmares and I thought
if I took enough benadryhl and sat in the jacuzzi, I'd get some real sleep.
She asked me if I wanted to talk about the nightmares and I started to say
no, but then just completely broke down, ran to her and she held me while
I cried my eyes out. Then I told her the problem." I took a deep breath and
let it out slowly. These were my friends who would accept me regardless;
I knew that, but this was harder than I thought. I was silent for a while
and no-one interrupted my silence. Larry had scooted closer and it was all
right. "The doctor had told Millie to keep me awake for a couple hours, but
she didn't have to do anything except listen because it took me two hours
to get out what was bothering me. When I finished, she asked what I thought
I needed to do and I told her I needed to see the therapist alone and then
talk to you guys. I didn't want to talk to Larry alone," I glanced up at
Larry, "because I wasn't sure what he would say."
I took another deep breath and was
silent for a while. The sun was low and it was getting cool so I said, "I
think we need to get dressed," and we did. We all settled down again--this
time I had Larry sit between my legs--and, after another deep breath, I started
telling the whole story. "Larry, I should have realized what was buried in
the deep, deep part of my memory the day... well, you know." I looked at
Larry. Tears started down his face again. I couldn't take that. Unless I
was careful I was going to undo all that he had accomplished in recent weeks.
I wrapped my arms around him and, when he turned to face me, kissed him savagely,
the first real kiss he had in a week. "Babe, don't. It's just that when that
happened, I suddenly looked at you and saw Rev. McBride. It was just for
a second and I didn't know why and didn't even remember it until later. That
Sunday when I saw all those tapes being brought in, I didn't know why, but
I got very upset. Then that night I had my first nightmare. When I woke up,
I realized the nightmare wasn't so much a nightmare as a memory I had pushed
out of my mind. Each night the nightmares got worse and each time I woke
up, I remembered more."
Shaking all over I said,"Ok, I guess
I may as well start at the beginning." I pulled Larry to me and held him
tightly. For the first time in, I guess in a week, I rested my head in the
crook of his neck, inhaling the scent of my man as he reached back and stroked
my hair. Suddenly I knew what I should have known all along: he loved me
and would still love me when he knew the truth. "Six years ago--I had just
turned twelve--my father caught me whacking off in the bathroom. He beat
me until I could hardly stand and made me use the bathroom with the door
open afterwards. When summer came, I was told I was going to the Temple of
Praise summer camp. 'Rev. McBride will get the devil out of you so you'll
stop playing with yourself. You keep that up and Rev. McBride says you could
become a homo-sex-ual.' The camp was for boys ten to fifteen and was really
rugged. We slept on shelf-like things without a mattress, were up at 5 and
kept up until all hours. There was practically continual hymn singing, bible
reading and preaching. We were fed little enough and what there was, was
pretty terrible. Showers were just shower heads attached to a board across
some trees with boards to stand on. No hot water."
"When we had been in camp a few days,
the Rev. McBride had all of us--there were about twenty boys--strip and line
up on the boards under the showers. He said, 'Look around you. See some of
you are already growing hair to try to hide your devil's tool. Well, all
of you have got to learn to beat the devil.' He had us take our cocks in
our hands and then to beat the devil. I knew what we were doing, we were
jacking off. I liked to do it when I was alone, but not there in front of
all these guys. I had matured early and had already started cumming when
I jacked off, even though I was only twelve. Most of the boys didn't--I guess
all of you remember when you just got weak kneed and nothing came. All the
time all of us were whacking off, Rev. McBride was making a video. He said
it was to prove we knew how to beat the devil out of his own tool. After
that day, he would call one of us into his cabin and have us show him how
we could beat the devil. I noticed he only selected those who could cum.
And he taped all of the sessions."
"After he had me in two or three times,
he said that I had a lot of the devil in me because every time he had me
beat the devil, a lot came out. Sometime during the second week, he came
into my cabin at night and got me and took me to his cabin. When we got there
he asked me if I remembered what to do if someone was snake bitten. I told
him what he had told us, you had to suck the poison out. 'You are right,'
he said, 'and you have to do the same thing with the devil in you. You have
a lot of devil in you, Eugene, just like your daddy said.' He had me undress
and then he started playing with my cock. When it got hard he said, 'See,
the devil has made his tool big. That devil has to be sucked out,' and he
started sucking my cock. I was very confused. I couldn't understand how sucking
out the devil could feel so good. He sucked and ran his tongue around the
head of my cock then he stuck his finger up my ass. When he did, I started
shooting and shot until I collapsed. When I did, he said I needed to keep
our session a secret because if I said anything, the devil would invade my
body and he couldn't help me then. I didn't know what was going on and I
had heard all about the devil and hell's fire. I was a very terrified twelve-year-old.
And, of course, he had a video camera going all the time he was sucking me
off."
"He sucked me off two or three times
that week. Then he asked me to suck him. I didn't want to. 'If you're holy,'
I asked him, "why would anyone have to suck the devil out of you?' He laughed
and said, 'See, you do know that you have the devil in you and I do not.'
One night in the third week, he came and got me in the night and took me
to his cabin where he put a hose attached to a bag up my ass 'to wash the
devil out.' It hurt like hell and I had horrible cramps, but he would fill
me full and wait until I squirted it out. He did it several times until the
water came out clean. 'See' he said, 'I've washed the shit out of you, but
the devil may still be inside. Sometimes the devil had to be poked out,'
he said as he put something up my ass and on his fingers and started poking
his fingers in my butt hole. He kept on, even when I told him he was hurting
me, until he had three fingers in me. 'My fingers ain't enough. I can still
feel the devil; he's still in there.' I was crying because I hurt so bad
but, instead of stopping, he started slapping my butt harder and harder."
I had been talking with my head down I was so ashamed and, when I glanced
up, I saw Luke holding Matt tightly and both were crying. My precious Larry's
head was resting on my shoulder and when I looked up, his face was all distorted
from his crying.
"He finally was hitting me so hard
I had a choice, stop crying or be hurt worse. I bit my lip and got control
of myself. He said, 'Now that's better. I've got to punch the devil out of
you.' He pushed me down on my hands and knees, put more stuff up my butt
and, when I looked through my legs, saw he was putting stuff on his cock.
When I realized what he was going to do, I started begging him not to, but
he went ahead. He shoved his cock up my ass and I wanted to die I hurt so
bad. 'That's just the devil in you crying because he knows he's going to
be poked out of you,' he said, and started fucking my ass. I kept begging
him to stop, but he just fucked harder and faster. He reached around and
got my cock and started beating it for all he was worth as he fucked me.
I finally felt him shoot a load in me and, when he did, I came too. When
he pulled out of me, he told me I was now holy and the devil had no control
over me. 'Don't you feel better?' he asked. I didn't want to say I felt dirty,
filthy and ashamed and, besides, I felt as if he had ripped my ass apart.
I was afraid if I said no, he would do it again and I knew it would kill
me I hurt so bad. I just nodded. He gave me some tissue, to 'wipe away the
devil' and, when I did, I saw that it was bloody. He gave me more tissue
and, when I wiped my ass, it was also bloody. He finally stopped giving me
tissue and said, 'Here's some holy oil,' as he gave me a jar of ointment.
'Anoint your outside and inside now and in the morning and until the places
where the devil came out of you are healed.' He sent me back to the cabin
after again telling me I had better not tell anyone or the devil would possess
me."
"Three or four days later, my father
came to pick me up and Rev. McBride told him I had been devil possessed and
he didn't know what I might think or say had happened but, 'Praise the Lord,
the devil has released him. The devil was making a homo-sex-ual pervert out
of him, but he has been saved.' I was still sore and hurting and when I got
home I tried to tell my mother what had happened. She called my father and
the two of them said I had been demon possessed and that Rev. McBride had
thought I had been saved, but I must not have been because I was accusing
that holy man of demonic acts. And, as they always did, they beat the shit
out of me. Gradually, they convinced me that I had the ideas put in my head
by the devil because such sinful, evil and perverted acts were filthy and
dirty and I needed to get them out of my head. Over the next few years I
listened as Rev. McBride preached again and again about the filthy, dirty
acts homo-sex-uals engaged in and I pushed the memories of those three weeks
further and further back in my mind until I, literally, had forgotten them.
Or so I thought."
"Then I met Larry and fell in love
with him. He was so good and kind and I loved him with everything I was.
I started questioning what Rev. McBride preached and when Larry and I started
playing around, I was in heaven. There could be no devil involved in how
I loved Larry and the joy he gave me." Suddenly Larry was no longer crying
softly. He was wailing as great sobs shook his body. I held him as close
to me as I could and kept saying, "Larry, don't. I love you, Babe." But I
had to finish the story. I had to get it out. "When Larry took me that day,
I saw a flash of Rev. McBride and didn't understand why. I soon forgot about
it until last Sunday when I saw him being brought in with all those video
tapes. I knew I should know something about them, but I just couldn't remember.
Then the nightmares started. They were replays of those three weeks six years
ago. I felt dirty, filthy and ashamed. I pushed you away, Larry, Babe, because
I felt I would make you filthy. I tried to forget again, but the harder I
tried, the clearer my memories became. Well, you know the rest. Finally,
after I tried to end it all--maybe I didn't think I was doing that, but clearly
I was, I went to Dr. Ridley today and told her the whole story. She told
me I had to talk it out with someone I trusted. I was so glad you guys would
be here for me and Larry."
"One thing I feared more than anything
was having to tell you, Babe, because we had come such a long way with having
you accept yourself and I knew that you could start hating yourself again
but, Babe, you cannot. I need you--not hating yourself, but loving me. I
need you, Larry. I was also afraid those tapes would be shown at the trial--I
know they have been sold all over the world, but anyone who has one is not
worth thinking about--but what if they were shown here and everyone saw me?
Dr. Ridley called Judge Snow while I was there and she told Dr. Ridley the
tapes were being reproduced by the Feds with the faces of those involved
blurred so we couldn't be identified. She said the Feds wanted to have Rev.
McBride, but she had told them he would have to face state charges for sexual
child abuse and then they could have him. Well, that's the whole pile of
shit. Except for one thing more..."
Matt interrupted me, "Jake Hilliard,
Danny Elrod and Buddy Johnson?"
I nodded, "They were at that camp the
next year." Everyone was silent for a bit then we were a mass of arms and
legs as all three of the best friends a man could have hugged me.
Larry
As I listened to Gene's story, I felt
all kinds of emotions. I wanted to get right up and go kill Rev. McBride
for what he had done to my babe. I felt like I was as big a pile of shit
as he was because I had raped Gene too. I felt my very insides being torn
apart by the pain my love had endured. I wanted to find old man Joyce and
strangle him. How could anyone treat a child the way McBride had? Or the
Joyces? How could anyone treat someone he loved more than life itself the
way I had treated Gene? Gene was right--we had come a long way, but this
sure didn't help my feelings about myself. I had cried until I was out of
tears when Gene finished and the guys started hugging us.
When the hugging was over, Gene held
me in his arms as tight as he could and gave me a tender loving kiss. "Larry,
you've got to know that I would never have survived without having you love
me. When I remembered what had happened, all I could think of was that I
was just a cheap whore and you couldn't possibly love me. But you do and
that's what counts. We have each other, as bruised and battered as we are."
Tears welled up in my eyes even though
I thought I had run out of tears long ago. I kissed Gene softly, gently,
and said, "Till death do us part."
He returned my kiss and said, "Till
death us do part."
It was sunset and the sky was all aglow
with yellows and reds and oranges. Matt looked toward the west and said,
"Larry, Eugene, it is the end of a day and of self-hate. There's no room
for that. There's only room for your love for each other. A day ends and
tomorrow is a new day. Try to remember that and put the past behind you."
We all sat silent until it was quite dark then walked away from the falls.
As he uncrossed the canes, Luke said, "I hope the river washes away the pain
spilled here today and gives healing. Matt, Gene and I said, "Amen," because
it truly was a prayer from our hearts.
Matt
Wednesday's practice was perfect. We
finished the first half of the program with so few mistakes I couldn't believe
it. Eugene was lavish with his praise for the ensemble and they lapped it
up like thirsty dogs. And, of course, they were--thirsty, that is--since
Eugene had had little or nothing good to say about their work for the last
few sessions. With the ensemble high, the chorus caught the spirit and, I
must admit, I did as well. When we finished, I was really high as were the
members of the ensemble and chorus who asked if we could practice the second
half Thursday. Jackson said, "I'd like to see if we can do as well with it
as we did today with the first half" and there was a chorus of "Let's do
it!" Paula, Eugene and I quickly agreed.
Luke had taken the Jeep so Eugene and
I sat on the church steps talking about the practice and how well it had
gone. Then he said, quietly, "Matt, Larry and I had a long talk after we
got home last night. I kept feeling like 'damaged goods' and when I said
that he said, 'And I did the damaging.' Well, I felt like I had driven a
knife through his heart. We kept talking and finally he said, "Eugene, I
know we can't go back. What has been done has been done, but maybe we should
do what Matt and Luke are doing. Maybe we should forget sex--I mean going
all the way--and kinda work up to that again. We talked some more and agreed
we would try, but at the same time, not set some deadline like you and Luke
have. When we both agree we are ready..."
"I don't know about that. Both Dad
and David said it's really hard--no pun intended," I said as Eugene started
laughing. "I mean once you start, to stop."
"That's the reason we said, 'Until
we are both ready'."
Luke drove up and parked on the street
and came up to the steps. "Matt, Eugene, I've been thinking. Why don't we
take a break and all go to that place in Lexington Friday night? That way
we won't have to worry about getting this Lakota on his organ bench next
morning."
"Sounds good. Who's invited?"
"All of the Fellowship I thought, but
then I remembered Paula's single, Jacob doesn't know about us and Mary Kathryn
and Michael are only fifteen and will have to have permission."
"Well, Mary Kathryn and Michael's birthdays
are in the next two weeks and, if we agree, maybe Jacob could be clued in
and be Paula's date later."
"So how about the four of us?" Luke
asked.
"Let's," Eugene said. "And we'll take
my car; that Jeep is not made for lovers."
"You know that too?" Luke laughed.
"It's a deal!"
As we headed toward the Jeep, Luke
said, "Where to, Matt? I really feel at loose ends."
"I know the feeling after today. With
Eugene's turn around, the practice was unbelievable today and there's nothing
I can do. Of course, we both need to get serious about reviewing for the
AP exams. Home first?" Luke nodded. As we got into the Jeep, I asked, "What
about your AP portfolio?"
"Mr. Stephenson has it for a final
check. It's on its way. One down, three to go. How do you feel about them?"
"English, a snap; physics, ok; calculus,
shakey, I'm afraid. Music? I'm really not sure since I haven't studied that
much music theory. You?"
Calculus, a snap; physics, ok; English,
shakey. Art? Mr. Stephenson and Uncle Michael say I have an easy five, but
I really don't know."
"Music and art are actually freebies,
aren't they? I definitely need work on calculus. I have all the review sheets."
"Same with English. Matt, why don't
we spend some time at my place? We know it's just going to be hugging and
no--well very little--playing around. Since we need to be studying and we
really are best where the other's the weakest, we could really get in some
good study time."
"Sounds good, Yonghon Tongmu. If we
were at my place, I know we'd spend more time playing around. We need to
be together to help each other out and maybe we'll get more comfortable at
your place. How about if I come over as soon as I finish dinner and spend
the night in your bed."
"I guess I could stand that," Luke
laughed, struggled across the gear shift and kissed me.
When I got home, I told Mom and Dad
what Luke and I had decided, also that we were planning on going to Lexington
with Larry and Eugene Friday night.
"Sounds good to me," Dad said.
"Matt, I hope you work hard on the
calculus. Mr. Mitchell is depending on your doing well. Same with Luke and
his English."
"That's the reason we're working at
Luke's," I said. Mom looked puzzled and Dad said, "I'll tell you later, Yong
Jin."
After supper, I went to Luke's and
we then settled down to work. We agreed to work until ten, dividing our time
between calculus and English. And we really did work without playing around.
Promptly at ten, we undressed and went to bed. The door had been wide open
all evening and we left it that way without comment. When we got in bed,
there was some really great kissing and we both got hard--we were still horny
nearly-eighteen-year-olds after all--but stopped with kissing and, wrapped
in each other's arms, we slept.
Six-thirty came very early and I discovered
that I much preferred the dreaded alarm clock to being woken by Mary Kathryn
yelling, "Ok, get your lazy, buck-naked asses out of bed. It's time to run."
Luke and I hopped out of bed, answered the call of nature, including a bit
of cleaning up since we both, obviously, had wet dreams, pulled on shorts
and hit the road. When we got back to my place, Luke said, "Matt, so long
as we are going to be doing this study routine, why don't we have supper
at your place and breakfast at mine?" I agreed and told Mom and Dad what
our plan was and they appreciated the fact that we were splitting meals with
our families.
After school, practice was even better
than the day before and we completed the second half of the program. I think
the concert could have been presented that night it went so well. When I
got home, Luke met me at the front door and gave me a Luke special kiss.
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, I missed you! I really am at loose ends. I've been feeling
like I should be busy doing something, but couldn't think what. 'Course if
you had been here, I'd have known what to do!"
"I'm here and we have an hour or so
before supper," I kissed Luke softly. As we started to my room, we stopped
in the library where Mom and Dad were grading papers. "Hi, Mom, Dad, I'm
home."
"We would never have guessed that was
the reason Luke stopped pacing the floor and ran to the door," Mom laughed.
"How did practice go?"
"Perfectly. Absolutely perfectly. We
are ready and we have two weeks to go. Paula, Eugene and I talked about cutting
back to a single practice next week since several of us will be taking APs."
"How're the study sessions going? You
two getting any work done or just playing around?" Dad asked.
"Actually, it may come as a surprise,
but we study. Half the time English and half calculus. No real playing around--I
mean some great hugging, kissing and cuddling when we go to bed, but that's
it."
"We still don't feel quite right with
anything else at my place."
"As I said, I can understand that.
It's my night to do supper so you have an hour," Dad said and smiled.
Luke
I quickly flipped Matt over my shoulder
and headed for his room. When we reached it, I kicked the door almost closed,
tossed Matt on the bed and started tickling him. He was laughing and struggling
to get away as I started undressing him, stopping to kiss him from time to
time. He was finally undressed except for his briefs and I lay on top of
my Matt and started kissing him all over. This time I was the wild man. Matt
finally got his lips to mine and kissed me, open mouthed, sucking my tongue
into his mouth. Without breaking our kiss, he started undressing me. Soon
I, too, was down to my boxers. I rolled off Matt, put my arms around him
and looked into his beautiful black almond eyes. "Sarang Hanun Pomul, I have
missed you sooooo much this afternoon. I had nothing to do and all I could
think of was you." His lips covered mine and we were again engaged in a passionate
kiss.
When we broke our kiss, he said, "Yonghon
Tongmu, I was away from you for only a couple hours. What are we going to
do this summer? We'll be separated for six weeks."
"I know, Matt. I have been thinking
about that. I don't know how I can stand it. I know we will be busy and it
won't be like this afternoon when I had nothing to do and felt I had forgotten
something I was supposed to be doing. But we haven't really had time together
to make love for two days and it is nearly more than I can stand. Since your
program is only four weeks, maybe you can come and spend the last two weeks
I'm in Sarasota with me."
"Well, let's worry about that later
when we have more time. Right now there are more important things to be done!"
And, with those words, he became a wild Lakota Korean again. I loved it as
he kissed me all over, sticking his tongue in my belly button, my ear, my
mouth. He reached into my boxers and pulled out my man's tool and started
stroking it gently, slowly, while smiling and looking into my eyes. As he
continued to give me the pleasure I had missed so much, I reached down and
slipped off his briefs, releasing his--my--Lakota arrow. Matt removed his
hand for a moment to strip my boxers off and resumed his stroking. We lay
facing each other, giving each other pleasure, expressing our love in a very
physical way while our eyes told the other of the depth of the love we had
for our soulmate.
There's one thing about horny almost-eighteen-year-olds:
they have a short fuse, especially when they haven't really been with their
soulmate for a couple days! It seemed we had barely started making love to
each other's manhood when Matt covered my mouth with his, our breathing became
one and we both shot man's seed on the other. It was so short a time that
I felt we had cheated each other. "Babe, I think we just had a quickie and
as good as it was..."
"Yea, I know. I know what you mean,"
Matt said as his mouth again covered mine and we held each other close as
our passion was expressed in a kiss. We lay in each other's arms, feeling
the afterglow of love making, but somehow also feeling short-changed. "Babe,
we still have time to play in the shower," Matt said with a wicked grin on
his beautiful dark face. This time he tossed me over his shoulders and marched
across the hall to the shower. Soon the warm water was washing over our bodies
and Matt started soaping my body, releasing the fragrance that belonged to
my love. As I inhaled that scent, I started getting hard again. Matt kissed
me quickly and said, "Almost-eighteen-year-olds may have a short fuse, but
I see at least one of them had a short recovery time as well."
I grabbed Matt's tool and said, "I
think you can make that two, Sarang Hanun Pomul!" We continued to play in
the shower, soaping each other, stroking each other's tool, playing, until
we were both hard as rocks. I pulled Matt's back to me, reached around and
slowly stroked him. He pulled my head over his shoulder until his lips could
reach mine and started deep kissing me as I continued to give him pleasure
and love. When his breath started getting shorter and shorter, I increased
my stroking, harder and faster. He had an arm around my neck and the other
reached back and pulled my hips to his butt. Suddenly he pulled harder, gasped
and started shooting charge after charge. With his last spasm, he relaxed
his hold on me and I found myself supporting him. I held him until he was
steady on his feet. He turned, pulled my body to his and kissed me softly.
As he continued kissing me, his hand
found my manhood and he started stroking it, slowly, very slowly. Finally,
without missing a stroke, he moved behind me and pulled my body to his as
I had done and continued making love to me. I was moaning "Sarang Hanun Pomul,
Sarang Hanun Pomul" as I approached the point of release. Sensing I was nearing
my climax, Matt started stroking me hard and fast. My climax hit hard, very
hard, and I started sinking to my knees, but Matt held me. When I had discharged
my last man's seed, Matt turned me around and pressed his lips to mine, thrusting
his tongue into my mouth, bringing with it the wonderful and pure taste of
my Sarang Hanun Pomul.
For a change, I had been in such a
hurry that I had not let Matt's hair down and mine had not gotten wet, so
it didn't take us long to get cleaned up and dry. It was a good thing for
just as we finished dressing and were exchanging a kiss, Greywolf called,
"Supper's ready if you want it." Well, eighteen-year-olds may think about
sex most of the time, but there are moments when food does enter their thoughts
and I was starved!
As soon as we had finished supper,
Matt and I cleared the table and got ready to go to my place. We stopped
by the library and reminded the Greywolfs we planned to go to Lexington Friday
night with Eugene and Larry.
"I meant to ask you," Greywolf said,
"is there something wrong with Eugene? He has seemed very strange in class
this week. Larry doesn't seem his usual self either."
Matt looked at me and I guess we both
were debating whether or not we should say anything and, if so, what. After
all, Eugene had told his story behind the crossed canes. I finally said,
"Yes, Greywolf, there is something wrong. I hope it's being dealt with, but
I'm really not sure. That's all I can say because what we know was told us
at the falls."
"I understand," Greywolf said quickly,
"but if there is anything I can do to help, call on me."
"That goes for me as well," Mom Greywolf
said.
"Thanks for both of them. I'm sure
they will appreciate that and we will tell them." Matt and I both kissed
Mom and Dad Greywolf good-night and decided to walk home in a lovely May
evening even though the moonlight was very faint. And we did take it slowly,
stopping for a kiss, to just look at each other, to tell each other of our
love. Even at that, soon--too soon--we were in my room, hitting the books.
School sure can interfere with life sometimes!
Part Thirty-two
Michael
Matt and Luke were so involved in getting
ready for their AP exams, I didn't want to bother them--I mean Mary Kathryn
and I have two AP exams--biology and US history--but that is not like having
five. Nonetheless--I love that word, heard Yong Jin use it and it really
sounded so neat--nonetheless, I needed to talk to them. So Friday morning
when we were running, I let Mary Kathryn get ahead of me and signaled Matt
to drop back. I pretended I had a cramp and Matt got my signal quickly and
started massaging my calf. "Matt, Man, I have a real problem."
"What's that, Lil' Bro?"
"Well, you know Mary Kathryn's and
my birthdays are coming up?"
"Sure do. Sweet sixteen! Driving!"
"Yea, well, that too, but that's not
what has me worried. Bro, you're going to think I'm a silly fool."
"Lil' Bro, you know better than that."
"Well, some of the guys at school do.
They say I'm a fool for still being a virgin and nearly sixteen when I could
have been in Mary Kathryn's pants ages ago."
"Could you? I'm not so sure about that!"
"Ok, I could have at least tried. I
talked with Dad and Luke about becoming sexually active--shit, that sounds
like a health sex education something or other--anyway, they both said I'd
have to make up my own mind and the guys at school, well, they're kidding
me pretty hard. I thought about just telling them Mary Kathryn and I were
fucking like bunnies the way they do."
"You mean the way they say they do.
Look, Michael, one thing you need to know. Guys lie big time when they are
bragging about 'Man, I'm getting so much pussy I'm just about fucked out
until I take a day off!' That's what they say and you can be pretty sure,
the louder the talk, the less the action. And what about Mary Kathryn? How
would she feel if you did that?"
"Matt, I will feel lower than dog shit
if I did run around bragging--even if it were so. I mean, what Mary Kathryn
and I have is very precious to me. It's not like I ever look at her as something
to fuck, I mean, I never look at her... Well, you know what I mean, don't
you?"
"I think so. She's the love and light
of your life and one day you want to express that by making love to her physically,
well, I mean by having sex with her. But you're not ready right now. Right?"
"Yea, it has to be special, loving..."
"Michael, Michael."
"Yea, yes Matt?"
"Lil' Bro, you've got a dreamy look
in your eyes and on your face. You have drifted off into the land of romance.
"Yea, I have."
"So, Michael, if you can come back
to this world, what's the problem?"
"Matt, I don't like being kidded and
called names. I mean, I'm pretty tough, but it gets under my skin."
"Lil' Bro, your love's brother and
I will be eighteen soon and we're virgins. Since we never so much as really
dated girls, we get called names--they could be worse--and kidded a lot."
"Yea, but that's different. I mean,
at sixteen you were gay and not interested in girls."
"I guess that's different. Actually,
I was gay, but didn't know it or accept it. All I knew was I loved a Larsen
with my whole being. That love has grown and changed since my sweet sixteen,
but it had remained loving with all I knew--know--about love. So what's different
about that?"
"All I know is I love a Larsen with
everything I am, as much as any almost-sixteen could possibly love. I guess
there's really no difference. But I still hate the kidding."
"Lil' Bro, when you and Mary Kathryn
have sex is up to you two. Oh, Jens and David may talk big, but when you
get ready you will. In the meantime, when someone starts kidding you, give
them that wicked Michael grin and say 'If you only knew, you'd envy me because
I sure as hell have more going for me than you do.' Then let them think what
they want. They'll let up because since you don't give them the details they
read off the net or some sleazy magazine, they'll wonder just what you have
discovered that they haven't. And tell Mary Kathryn. She will know how to
let the girls know what is going on and I suspect some who may be 'gettin'
some' will find their supply cut off. And, Michael, talk with Bill. He has,
in his own words, fucked around a lot and has some thoughts on that and,
believe me, he's not gay!"
"Thanks, Bro. Now if I just knew what
to get Mary Kathryn for her birthday!" I laughed and hugged Matt. "See you
shortly," I said as I turned to go into the house. It sure was good to have
an older brother and, believe me, Matt was as much a brother as he would
have been had we had the same parents. But I really did need help in selecting
a birthday gift for my wild woman. I laughed at myself. I guess you have
to be around sixteen when deciding about having sex and selecting a birthday
present seem equally serious!
Eugene
When I went down for breakfast, Millie
said, "Son, there's an article in this morning's paper which is of interest
to you. You can read it later if you like, but essentially what it says is
that the Temple of Praise has hired a high-powered lawyer from Jackson to
represent McBride. He filed a brief with a judge above Judge Snow, after
she refused it, requesting that the video tapes with kids' faces obscured
not be allowed since the children cannot be recognized. He argues that while
they might be used in connection with child pornography, they cannot be used
as evidence of child abuse because no child can be identified. Unfortunately,
the altered tapes have been barred. The three in the state hospital have
agreed to testify but, as the DA said, how will a jury view three witnesses
who are presently in a mental hospital. I called one of my lawyers and he
agrees that it is going to be a pretty weak case if it rests on what will
be called mental patients. I instructed my lawyer to file as a friend of
the court, but it doesn't look good."
"Shit! That bastard is going to get
away with years of child abuse! It's not fair, Millie! It's not fair!"
"Son, I would have thought you would
have learned long ago: life is life, it's not fair!"
"Mom, what should I do?"
"Son, I can't answer that for you.
I pulled you out of that tub when you attempted to drown off your memories
of the past and I suspect, your fear of the present. I wish I could answer
for you. I wish there was an easy answer. I wish you had never been hurt
as you have. But wishes don't change things. Talk to your love because your
decision will definitely affect him. Talk to your friends. I know you won't
have an easy time of it, regardless of what you decide but, remember, I'm
here for you."
I hugged Millie who held me to her
ample bosom and stroked my hair as I cried. "Mom, just once, I would like
to be free and happy for longer than a few days."
"I know, Son." She continued holding
me until I stopped crying. She lifted my head, kissed me on the forehead
and said, "Eugene, when you hurt, I hurt, but you have brought me more happiness
than I ever dreamed possible. I love you dearly, Son."
"I love you too, Mom."
I got ready for school and drove by
Larry's and picked him up. As soon as he was in the car he asked, "Read the
morning paper, Gene?"
"No, but Millie told me about the article.
Lar, I broke down and cried again. What should I do? Millie talked to one
of her lawyers and he's afraid that without the tapes and with the only live
witnesses being called mental patients, McBride will walk."
"Well--Hey! What's with this Lar bit?"
"It just seemed to fit."
"Love it, Gene." Larry pulled my face
to his for a deep kiss.
I was trying to get into it and see
where I was driving, when I gave up and pulled to the side of the street
for an absolutely divine kiss which went on until I finally asked, "Are we
going to make out or go to school?"
"Man, if those are the choices, the
decision is easy! But I'm much afraid it's not a real choice," he said, gave
me a final kiss and scooted to his side of the car.
"But Lar, what am I going to do? I
just about came apart when I thought they might show a video of me being
fucked by McBride. Then I was told I couldn't be recognized. Now the tapes
are all out without live witnesses and the only ones who are willing to testify
are--will be--called crazy, insane, unreliable mental patients."
"Gene, I can't make the decision for
you. I'm here for you regardless. Would it help if you talked to Luke and
Matt? Want to talk to the whole bunch? Want to be left alone? Babe, it's
your call."
"I don't know, Lar. I just learned
this morning. I'll think about it. But love me, babe. Love me." I had pulled
into the parking lot and parked beside Matt.
Larry pulled me to himself for a kiss.
"To hell with anyone who has a problem with me loving my man," he said and
kissed me again.
When lunch rolled around I was still
in a quandary as to what I should do. I couldn't stand the thought of that
bastard McBride getting away with what he had done to so many boys, but I
was also terrified of what would happen if I testified. I mean, what would
people think of me? When everyone had gathered around our table, I was sure
of one thing: the Fellowship of the Rings would stand by me--well, I wasn't
sure about Jacob. He was a part of the Fellowship, but not really since he
was in the dark about us. Michael--always Michael--started the discussion
by asking, "I suppose all of you know what's happened to McBride? Everyone
had. "Well, I hope someone other than the three in the hospital will testify
but, damn, it would be hard. I always said I'd do what was right and stand
up for what was right, but I don't know..."
"Ok, Gang, I guess... I guess..." Everyone
was suddenly silent and looking at me. Larry reached for my hand as Luke
took the other and Matt placed his atop Larry's. "Jacob, this is neither
the time nor the place nor way I planned to tell you, but..." Michael got
up, stood behind me and placed a hand on my shoulder. "Jacob, first off,
I want you to know I'm gay. Do with that what you will."
"And I am his lover," Larry said without
hesitation. Everyone was looking at Jacob to see his reaction.
Jacob got a silly grin on his face
and said, "I kinda got an idea that might be so when I saw you kiss Eugene
this morning. And while we're at it, I'm not, but have no problem with it.
My favorite cousin is gay and he's a great guy, just doesn't have the kind
of plumbing I dream--wet of course--about. Further, if what I saw in a Jeep
a couple days ago is any indication, I don't think you two guys are the only
gay couple in the Fellowship."
I guess Matt's blushing was catching
or it might have been a reflection of his red face lighting up Luke's.
"Well, so much for having Paula see
how Jacob would handle two gay couples in the Fellowship," Luke said.
"Well, there's more. Much more. I was
also one of those McBride abused. Along with other things such as having
me beat off, sucking me off, he raped me when I was twelve. I had pushed
it so far back into my memory that I had forgotten it until I saw those video
tapes--he had videoed everything he had me do and did to me--then I started
having nightmares." I told them everything which has happened since then.
"Now I have to decide."
"Eugene, I'll stand by you regardless
of what you decide," Jacob said. "I can't imagine what it must be like to
be abused--raped. Man, you've got guts even to be around after that. You
decide to testify and I think you're a number one hero. But if you decide
not to, I sure can understand. I don't think I would, to be honest."
"Thanks, Gang. I know it's finally
my decision, but it's a great feeling to know you have people standing with
you." I looked at Larry and saw a tear running down his cheek. I reached
out with my napkin and wiped it away. "Hope I didn't sandpaper your face,
Lar, but this school napkin is like recycled sandpaper, and it's all I have."
Larry smiled, weakly, but he smiled.
"Matt, I guess a very minor problem
has been solved by Jacob; we don't have to worry about him any more. And
you know something, I just remembered Nelson said something about 'with permission'.
Gang, Matt and I, Eugene and Lar..."
"Hey, that's for private use only,"
Eugene interrupted.
"Sorry. We were planning on going to
the club in Lexington tonight. We wanted to ask all of you, but with Jacob
not knowing..."
"And me single," Paula added. She's
not dumb.
"Well, I guess getting permission for
the straight couple in the family will be easy and, now that Jacob knows
about us... Jacob, think you could tolerate two guys dancing together?" Matt
asked.
"And having a Lakota Korean kissing
the fool out of his partner while doing it?" Luke added and Matt blushed.
"Hey, whatever you're into so long
as it doesn't step on my space. And Paula, just friends of course, but I'd
be happy and honored to step out with you, Prom Queen!" Jacob said.
"That settles that. Linda, Bill, up
to a night on the town?" Luke asked.
"Damn straight--no offense," Bill laughed.
"What time?"
"Dinner? Steak and Ale? I like that
place," Linda said.
"We could, but not necessary. There's
a bistro at the place and we wouldn't need reservations," Luke answered.
"And more time for dancing," Mary Kathryn
allowed.
"Damn, that means that Jeep again!"
Luke whined. "Unless... Matt, how's the insurance on the Jeep?"
"When Yong Jin fixed it for you, it's
fixed for anyone I give permission to drive it."
"Jacob, would you and Paula be willing
to drive Matt's Jeep. It sure puts a crimp in my style."
"Sure," Jacob said, "but, as I observed,
it's not a major crimp."
"Try a gear shift in the balls and
then say that!" Luke exclaimed. "How about we meet at Matt's place at 5:30?"
"That's kinda pushing it, Yonghon Tongmu.
I mean we have to get all sexy and good looking and, for some of us--like
you, that takes a while. And we don't have to rush back since I don't have
to be at St. Mary's next morning. 6:30 sounds more reasonable."
"As I recall, Sarang Hanun Pomul, it
takes you about 10 seconds to get sexy and good-looking, but I think you
better wear clothes!" The whole gang laughed as Matt turned bright red. "Ok,
meet at Matt's at 6:30."
Luke
After school, we went straight home.
I had Matt drive me by the house to pick out clothes and then we went to
his place. Since we had some time before anyone else got home--we were skipping
last period these days--It seemed just made for some serious love making.
When we got to Matt's room, he dashed across the hall and came back with
a huge beach towel. As soon as I saw it, I knew what he had in mind, "YES!!!"
I exclaimed. Matt then held up the bottle of massage oil.
"Yonghon Tongmu, you lie down right
there and don't move a muscle! I'll be right back." Matt left the room and
I heard him going down the stairs two at a time. I wondered what he was up
to, but I did as he said. I lay on my back, my hands behind my head, staring
at the ceiling and thinking about how much I loved my beautiful, full-of-life
Matt. Only minutes after he left, he came back into the room, placed the
bottle of oil on the night stand and became a wild Lakota as he climbed my
body, literally, lying atop me and smothering me with kisses. I was finally
able to get to his hair and, when it was loosened, I was covered with a cascade
of blackness and the fragrance of my love filled the room. Our lips locked
in a deep, passionate kiss, Matt started undressing me. When my shirt was
off, he started kissing my bare chest, licking my nipples and sucking one,
then the other. Without taking his attention from what he was doing to my
chest, Matt had my belt and pants opened before I knew it. I raised my hips
from the bed and he slipped them down my legs. Finally, rocking back on his
heels, he pulled them off my legs and quickly slipped his thumbs in the band
of my briefs and freed my man's tool which was already hard. As he freed
it, Matt started moving up my body, looked up, gave me a wicked Matt grin
and quickly kissed my cock. "Matt!" He looked at me, grinned and slid up
my body to cover my mouth with his. While he was kissing me, I removed his
shirt and opened his pants. Matt flipped himself in the bed and I pulled
his pants and briefs off.
Did I dare? Sure I did. I kissed the
head of my love's Lakota arrow. Matt flipped himself again and looked into
my eyes as a special Matt smile covered his face. "On your stomach, Bright
Angel!" I turned over, placed my head on my arms as Matt reached for the
oil.
He poured a stream of WARM oil down
my back. "Oh, Babe, that is wonderful! What did you do?"
"I nuked it. Margaret told me 15 seconds
or less in the microwave would do wonders."
"It already has, babe. The fragrance
is filling the room as never before and it feels soooooooo good."
"It's just started!" Matt started massaging
my shoulders and neck, kneading the muscles in warm oil. His fingers were
absolute magic on my back and, finally, on my butt. He, again, allowed his
fingers to slide over my cheeks, into my crack and brush my rosebud. I was
streaming precum as he moved down my legs and started massaging my feet.
He then moved back up my body, his body sliding over my oil-slicked back.
When he reached my neck, he started kissing the back of my neck, then stuck
his tongue in my ear while laughing madly. I turned my head, lifted it, and
his lips met mine as his hair created our world. "On your back, Yonghon Tongmu!"
When I turned on my back, it was obvious what Matt's attention was doing
to me as my Nordic spear stood straight out from my body. Matt's body covered
mine, his hair filling my whole being with the scent of my man as his mouth
covered mine in a deep, passionate, kiss.
Raising himself, he reached for the
oil and poured a warm stream over my chest. Straddling my body, he started
massaging my shoulders and neck and quickly moved his hands to my chest where
he pinched my nipples, rubbed his palms over them, then continued on down
my body. Avoiding my manhood, he massaged my legs and, again, paid particular
attention to my feet. Finally, he reached for the oil again and as he did,
his hair covered my cock. The feeling was so exotic! I almost shot and started
groaning, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, Sarang Hanun Pomul, damn, Matt, your hair
is driving me crazy!" Matt just looked at me, smiled, and released a stream
of warm oil over my man's tool.
Leaning over me, he spilled his hair
over my rock hard manhood. Looking into my eyes, he gave me a mischievous
grin and started shaking his head. His hair on my pulsating cock was driving
me wild! Again, Matt poured warm oil over it and took it in his hand, kissed
the head and started stroking me oh so sloooowly, all the time looking at
me with those sparkling black almond eyes, and the mischievous little boy
smile on his face. As he continued to stroke my manhood, he slid up my body,
placed his lips to mine and his tongue invaded my mouth as my breathing became
faster. I was breathing through Matt's mouth as his hand started moving faster
and faster. I was making small noises in my throat as I held him to my chest,
tightly. Then it hit. Skyrockets went off in my head as I stopped breathing
for a moment. I was only conscious of the scent of my love, his arm around
me and the electric charges going through my body and the fireworks in my
head. As I gradually became conscious again, Matt smiled at me and again
shook his hair over my now very, very sensitive man's tool. I grabbed him,
pulled him to me and kissed the reason I was alive and wanted to live forever.
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, if it gets better than that, I don't think I can stand
it!" Matt's sparkling eyes looked into mine, a smile covered his dark, beautiful
face and the scar told me the pleasure he had given me was but another of
the many ways he had shown his love for me. He lay beside me as I gave him
a tender, love-filled kiss and said, "Now, it's my time to make you see stars!"
I reached for the oil and found it had cooled so I said, "Wait for me, Dark
Angel!' Matt warned me to test the oil after I had nuked it because it got
hot quickly. Three minutes later I was back, and proceeded to attempt to
give Matt as much pleasure as he had given me--and all indications were that
I succeeded!
After we had lain in each others arms
for awhile, Matt said, "Yonghon Tongmu, love sure is messy," and laughed
a great Matt laugh. "I think we better get cleaned up."
"Do we have to?"
"No, but I hear the shower calling."
The truth of the matter was that both of us had just about exhausted our
passion or lust and our time in the shower was plain playful. Of course,
we washed each other thoroughly, including our hair. Matt had gotten his
really oily with his using it to give my man's tool a new thrill, but we
were clean long before we decided to get out of the shower. In fact, I don't
know that we would have got out, had the water not started getting cold.
Matt
I always enjoyed making love to my
man, but today was special. It was fun and it was fantastic. And, believe
me, Luke had made me wonder if going all the way could be more fantastic.
We were both exhausted when we finally dragged ourselves out of the bed and
into the shower. But we're young and our energy returned quickly and both
were playful as puppies when we got in the shower. We played until the water
started to get cold, then dried each other and tended to each other's hair.
Luke's hair was now a mass of pale gold curls covering his head. It only
added to his already perfect beauty. He had chosen all black for tonight.
When he was dressed, I looked at him and knew he needed something special
and realized I had it. I opened my treasure box and took out the beaded headband
I had worn to Lexington and put it around his head. Perfect!
I looked in my closet, having decided
I, as Luke, would wear something a bit less dramatic than the last time.
I decided on black pants and a bright red shirt. Both Luke and I left our
medallions out. When we were dressed, Luke took me into his arms and said,
"You are beautiful, you are wonderful, your are mine and I love you more
than life itself." His kiss was soft, tender, loving.
"Yonghon Tongmu, I have dreamed of
loving you as long as I can remember. Never did I dream you would love me
and, even had I dared, I could never imagine how wonderful it would be to
hear you say those three words, 'I love you!' And, Yonghon Tongmu, never
could I have imagined how very, very much I could and do love you." Again,
we shared a tender kiss. "My heavens, it's six already! I suspect the rents
are home so I guess we better go down." Holding hands, we went downstairs
and found Dad sitting on a stool in the kitchen, helping Mom prepare their
supper.
"Well, from the looks on your faces,
the fragrance throughout the house and the fact that there is no hot water,
I suspect two of Independence's finest cut class today and played around."
"Two, I believe the words are stud
muffins, ditched? Couldn't be," Mom laughed.
"Technically true, I suppose, Mr. and
Mrs. Greywolf," Luke said in his most serious voice, "however, I would like
to point out that 1) most seniors are doing nothing and 2) we two, Independence's
finest, have completed all the requirements of the classes we ditched that
we could do at this time. As to playing around, we did not play around. It
was serious business! I am, however, afraid we are responsible for the lack
of hot water but, I assure you, you would rather have cold water than..."
"Spare us the details, Mr. Larsen,"
Mom said, in her best classroom voice. We all had a great laugh.
"You look great guys. Luke, the headband
really suits you," Dad said, "but a blond Lakota I'm not sure about." We
continued just talking and joking until the kids started arriving. Bill,
Linda, Paula and Jacob came in first. While both Dad and Mom knew Jacob as
a student, he was properly introduced and welcomed into our house.
We got to Lexington about 8 and went
straight to the club. We were all starved so we went to the bistro and proved
that next to sex with teenagers was food. We were all in a great mood and
even Eugene seemed relaxed and happy. When we finished, we walked to the
dance floor where the DJ was already on duty. The music was fast and loud
and we immediately hit the floor. One of the nice things about fast dancing
was that you really didn't dance with a partner. Before I knew it, the gang
was dancing like mad and the guys were trying to outdo each other. I had
seen the Gang of Four dance and Michael was, hands down, the best at fast
dancing. He was going wild when Bill danced over in a kind of male challenge
and it was on. The rest of us just stood back and watched. Matt was an excellent
dancer and I wasn't bad, but neither of us could keep up with Michael's moves.
I noticed Jacob standing near me with a wicked smile on his face. Before
I knew what was happening, he hit the floor and challenged Bill and Michael.
They got wilder and wilder and soon had the floor to themselves. Everyone
was standing on the sidelines, egging them on. That Jacob had some moves!!
When the song ended, the DJ put on another equally fast one and the three
started again. Michael was barely holding his own when Mary Kathryn had enough
of her man being challenged and hit the floor, and the two started a wild,
erotic dance. Cheers were rocking the roof.
As if to answer the challenge, Linda
and Paula slinked onto the floor and immediately became wildcats! Eugene
and Larry, Luke and I were shouting, applauding and having a ball. While
there was no doubt Luke and I couldn't match what was going on out on the
floor, Luke grabbed my hand and we were on. Eugene and Larry couldn't resist
and soon the entire Fellowship of the Rings was competing against each other
in an unofficial contest. The cheering got louder and louder and our dancing
got wilder. When the music finally ended, the DJ said, "Let's hear it for
Mr. Greywolf and his entourage!" Those on the sidelines shouted, whistled,
and applauded. "Now, to see the kids really get into dancing, here's their
song!" We were all still standing on the floor when the music started and
"More" poured from the speakers. In spite of the fact that we were all panting
and sweating after the fast dancing, we each gathered our partner into our
arms and started slow dancing. Luke rested his head in the crook of my neck
and whispered, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, I love you, man, I love you!" and started
singing softly. Then I realized that everyone--well, maybe not Jacob--was
singing to their partner. Michael and Mary Kathryn started the kissing, but
soon everyone except Jacob and Paula was dancing with their lips pressed
to their partner's.
When the song ended, we returned to
our tables and were all sweating like mad. "I think we need drinks," Michael
was finally able to say but, just as he got the words out of his mouth, Nelson
and Holly appeared with a tray of soft drinks and water. Water was the drink
of choice--at least at first.
"Matt, Luke good to see you again.
I assume these are friends?" Luke introduced the group and invited Nelson
and Holly to join us. "We will if we're not expected to accept a challenge
to dance! I haven't seen anything like that around here."
"I guess it's because we're just from
a hick town and have nothing better to do," Bill laughed.
"Well, the fact that our mamas sent
four of us to dance class every Saturday when we wanted to be playing might
have helped too," Mary Kathryn said.
"Those four sure have taught the rest
of us how to slow dance. Man, I can't understand how that ever went out of
fashion," Larry said.
We sat around, talking and drinking--water
and then soda. Gradually couples started getting up for a dance and returning.
When everyone was on the floor except Luke and I, Nelson asked, "What's going
on in Concord with this Rev. McBride?"
"We'll tell you, but if Eugene comes
back, it stops. He was abused by McBride and is trying to make a very hard
decision," Luke said. Luke then told Nelson what all the uproar was about.
When Luke finished, Nelson said, "Holy
shit!"
The conversation ended as Larry and
Eugene came back to the table. As he walked up, Eugene said, "Matt, think
Larry and I could spend the night at your place? It'll be late when we get
back, but Lar and I need to talk to you and Luke tonight or tomorrow."
"Sure, the guest room's yours."
"Thanks. Guess I better call Millie.
She may already be in bed, but I don't want her to get up and find me gone."
"Phones are in the entrance. You couldn't
hear here," Nelson said. Eugene thanked Nelson and he and Larry went to make
calls. "He calls his mother Millie?"
Luke and I laughed. "Well, that's a
whole other story. Eugene's father is the senior elder in the Temple of Praise
where Rev. McBride holds forth."
"Shit! I bet he had a litter of kittens
when he found out his son was gay."
"Not sure. Not even sure he knows,"
Luke said and told Nelson about Eugene's being beaten and thrown out of his
house.
"Because he took part in that service?"
"Yes. He was adopted the next day by
Millie Willingham who is..."
"Who is Concord! Even here in Lexington
most of us know that. Damn. And she knows he's gay?"
"She has a gay son. Eugene is the grandson
she'll never have. Of course, legally he's her son and she calls him son.
And she knows about Larry and Eugene."
"Poor kid. I thought my brother had
it hard. Hope things work out for him, but I'm sure glad I'm not in his shoes,
but he's got guts.
"This whole bunch has guts and we have
had to prove it this year," Luke said.
The Fellowship continued enjoying itself
until the last dance was announced at 12:30. Someone in the crowd shouted,
"Greywolf's choice" and others took up the cheer. The DJ said, "No need to
ask. Greywolf's choice, 'More'."
When we got to the cars, I said, "Jacob,
why don't you keep the Jeep until tomorrow? I don't need it and Larry and
Eugene are spending the night at my place. Bring it out when you feel like
it." Jacob was happy to do so.
As we started to Eugene's car, Eugene
asked, "Matt, will you or Luke drive? From what I saw in the rear view mirror,
that back seat is perfect for making out and I'd like to try it." Luke grabbed
the keys when Eugene tossed then in the air and slid into the driver's seat.
The drive home was pretty calm in the front seat, but steam was rising from
the back!
It was almost two when we got home
and I asked Eugene if he wanted to talk tonight or wait. "I know we are all
bushed. That was an exciting evening and I am so glad we went and very glad
that the whole Fellowship went," Eugene replied. "I know we are tired and
ready for bed, but I think I might sleep better if we talked now." We were
all four in my room, sitting on my bed, waiting for Eugene.
"I have been thinking about whether
or not to testify against McBride. Tonight I forgot about it while we were
having fun but, as soon as we headed for the cars, that was all I could think
about."
"From what I saw in the rear view mirror,
you did have some other things on your mind!" Luke said with a laugh.
"Well, I'll admit that it soon slipped
my mind after Lar and I got in the back seat," Eugene said with a slight
smile.
"Eugene, you know you have steadfast
friends who will stand by you regardless of your decision and I know it is
not an easy one," I said.
"That's the only reason I have kept
thinking about it I'm sure. But I don't think I could live with myself if
I allowed McBride to walk, not only because of what he did to me and other
boys in the past, but I'm sure he would not stop if he were set free. I've
decided to testify and, God, Lar, I know it will hurt you."
"No, it won't hurt me. I mean, it will
because I know it will be painful for you, but he has already hurt me all
he can. I can and will only admire you for your guts, Gene," Larry said very
softly as he pulled Eugene to himself for a tender lover's kiss.
"I guess I just needed reassuring.
I know you guys will stand by me, but I needed to hear the words and probably
will need to hear them again and again. Now I hope I can sleep. Having Larry
beside me helps a whole lot."
"Luke looked at me with a real twinkle
in his eye and winked. I knew exactly what he meant. I took what was left
of the massage oil out of the night stand and headed for the kitchen. Luke
got beach towels and said, "Larry, come with me."
When I got back upstairs, Eugene was
alone, looking puzzled, and I said, "Come with me," took his hand and headed
to the guest room. Luke had found a couple large candles and placed them
on the night stands on either side of the bed, covered the bed with the towel
and left another towel folded on the foot of the bed. I put the oil on the
night stand and Luke and I said "Goodnight, sweet dreams."
When we reached my room, I asked, "Luke,
why was there another towel on the bed?"
"Babe, Eugene has hardly been sleeping,
even with Larry in bed with him. I have a hunch that if Larry is half as
good as you are, it will not end like our sessions with the oil. I suspect
Eugene will be sleeping like a baby before Larry finishes. I told Larry just
to cover him with the second towel, so there'll be no oil on the bedcovers,
and let him sleep."
"You know, Yonghon Tongmu, you have
a heart as big as all outdoors."
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, don't know what
size it is. I guess you know because it belongs to you." With those words,
Luke kissed me softly and started undressing me and, as soon as he finished,
I uncovered the whole of my Luke's beauty. We crawled into bed, Luke lying
on his back and me lying with my head on his chest, listening to his warm
and loving heart beating. "Matt, sometimes I get to feeling sorry for us
having to hide, with all that's happened because of our love, but when I
look at Larry and Eugene..."
"I know, but they have each other and,
even with their rough start, I think they meant it when he said, 'Till death
do us part'."
"I sure know I meant it, Dark Angel."
"And so did I, Bright Angel." Our lips
met in a soft, tender, loving kiss and--in each others arms-- we slipped
into the Land of Dreams.
It was ten o'clock when I waked up.
Luke was still sound asleep and I got up, slipped on shorts and a T-shirt,
and went downstairs without disturbing him. Mom and Dad were in the kitchen
having a cup of coffee. Apparently they had slept in as well since it was
obvious they had just finished breakfast. "Have a late night?" Dad asked.
"As if you didn't know," I laughed.
"I know you and Mom keep tabs on your youngest--and oldest."
"Since you got in late and we seem
to have extra kids this morning, I assume you had a good time," Mom said.
"We had a great time. It was good that
Jacob was able to go so Paula would have someone. We danced our legs off!
And the last song, without our asking, was 'More'! I let Jacob drive the
Jeep since Luke maintains it places a crimp in his style. Eugene asked that
Luke or I drive home so he and Larry could make out in the back seat. Yes,
we had a fantastic time!"
"Something developing with Paula and
Jacob?" Mom asked.
"Don't think so. Jacob is a free spirit
and not likely to be tied down and I'm sure Paula is still stinging from
that jerk Sheldon. No, I think they are friends and that's the way it will
be. Besides, she will be gone next year and Jacob will still be here. Larry
and Eugene asked to stay over because Eugene wanted to talk when we got back."
"I hope Millie knows where he is. I
know how I would be if I had gotten up this morning and you weren't here."
"Not to worry. He called her from Lexington
before it was too late."
"Eugene wanted to talk about his problem?"
Dad asked.
"Yes, and since he talked here and
it will all come out soon, I guess I can tell you about it. He was one of
McBride's victims." I then told Mom and Dad the whole horrible story. "When
the newspaper said McBride might walk because the only witnesses would be
three mental patients, he just about went nuts. Well, he was well on his
way before." I told them about his apparent attempt at suicide. "He was afraid
what would be said if he testified, but he has decided to do so. Millie has
a lawyer who has filed as a friend of the court and I guess Eugene will be
talking with him today or as soon as he can."
"The kid has guts and that's for sure,"
Dad said.
"Who has guts?" a somewhat groggy Luke
asked.
"Mom handed him a cup of coffee as
he sat down and Dad said, "Matt was just telling us about Eugene. He has
guts. I admire his courage and understand his situation."
"Breakfast?" Mom asked.
"Foolish question," I responded. "I
could eat a horse."
"Afraid that's not on the menu, but
if you could make do with bacon and eggs I could handle that."
"Pile it on," Luke said as Larry walked
into the kitchen. Luke got him a cup of coffee and he joined the group around
the table.
"Eugene still asleep?" Mom asked.
"Like a baby. I was careful not to
disturb him since I think it's the first decent night's sleep he has had
in a couple weeks."
"From what I could smell in the hall
when I went up to check on you all this morning, I think he might have had
help," Dad said.
"Yea, thanks to Matt and Luke, I started
giving him a massage with warm oil..."
"That's why I heard the microwave ping
last night--rather this morning," Mom said. "When you guys are doing that
I sure hope you test the temperature of the oil before pouring it on someone.
Oil can get very hot very quickly."
"Matt warned us about that. And not
to worry, Mrs. Greywolf, Luke gave us a couple beach towels so we wouldn't
mess up the bed."
"Good to know Matt and Luke have learned
something. The first time they..."
"Mom!"
"Anyway, I'm pleased that it helped
him sleep."
"He was asleep before I finished. Sound
asleep, and I think he slept peacefully all night. I guess making a decision
and knowing his friends would stick by him eased his mind."
"I'm sure it did," Dad said. "And speaking
of the devil, good morning, Eugene. Understand you slept like an angel."
"Morning. It was more like a rock,
I think. Lar, why didn't you wake me up?"
"Why? You haven't slept worth a damn--sorry
Mrs. Greywolf--for a couple weeks and you expect me to wake you up from a
peaceful sleep? Not on your life. Guess getting the decision behind you made
a big difference."
"And the warm oil massage didn't hurt
any." Eugene kissed Larry gently. "Well, Mr. and Mrs. Greywolf, I guess I
need to tell you what this is all about."
"No need, Eugene, since we talked last
night and it will all be in the open soon, I thought it would be ok to tell
them. They know."
"Eugene, I can't tell you how much
I admire you and your courage. Having been where you have been..."
"You were sexually abused?"
"By an uncle when I was maybe a bit
younger than you were when McBride abused you. It's a hard thing to deal
with and even when you think you have dealt with it, you'll find you haven't.
I was lucky, as are you, that loving people were there to help me. It's painfully
true that often abused children become abusers. That's what happened, I'm
sure, in the case of the three guys in the state hospital. But even at that
there have been times... well, the night Matt told us he was in love with
Luke, I just behaved terribly. Not because he was gay or in love with Luke,
but I had a flashback to when..."
"I know about that, Mr. Greywolf. It
happened to me when... well, it happened to me. And when I saw those tapes
being brought in, it triggered something and I started having nightmares
until... well, I think I tried to kill myself although I wouldn't admit it,
even to myself. But last night, from the very beginning I had a wonderful
time. I knew I had friends who would stand beside me, and who could ask for
someone better than Millie to support them? Then when we got here and I told
Matt and Luke I was going to testify and they got Larry set up to give me
a massage, wow! I was asleep before I knew it."
"Always ready, Babe," Larry said, and
Eugene kissed him again.
"Well, don't think I won't call on
you, and I hope I don't have to wait until something's wrong. Wow, look at
that!" Mom had placed a huge plate of bacon and eggs on the table and Dad
brought hot biscuits from the oven.
"Dig in guys, I understand that food
ranks right up there next to sex for teenage males," Dad laughed.
"Sometimes I'm not sure it doesn't
outrank sex, especially when Mom Greywolf does breakfast and I am starved,"
Luke laughed.
After breakfast, Eugene and Larry took
off without bothering to shower--headed, I'm sure, for a shower and then
the jacuzzi. Luke and I took a leisurely shower, playing around, making love
and then got dressed for Saturday chores. He left and went home. We had agreed
to spend Saturday night at his place and include a study session. The closer
AP calculus came, the more shaky I felt.
I helped Dad with the Saturday chores,
showered and left for Luke's at six. Gabrielle had called and invited me
to supper. She had also invited Eugene, Larry and Millie. Of course, we had
a delicious meal which four teenaged boys fell into as though they hadn't
eaten in ages.
After dinner, we went upstairs to Luke's
room. Mary Kathryn was having supper with Michael so we had the upstairs
to ourselves. Eugene said he had felt great all day and was glad he had made
his decision. Millie was so proud of him she was about to bust, he said,
when he told her. Her lawyer and the DA had come over when she called them
and they spent the afternoon talking about how they would handle the new
development. It was decided Eugene would view tapes to make sure they were
the ones made during his camp and of him. "I know it is not going to be easy,
but Larry has agreed to watch with me. The DA said McBride had carefully
labeled tapes and he was sure he could pick out those of me. I'm sure the
hell not looking forward to that!" When he finished, Larry hugged him and
Luke and I joined in.
The visitors left at eight and Luke
and I immediately hit the books, going to bed after midnight. We had not
split the time between English and calculus tonight because Monday was the
first AP exam--English. Luke had two problems with English, both of which
were a matter of attitude rather than intelligence or knowledge. He had a
real problem understanding metaphor, which seemed really strange to me since
he used it constantly. After we had been dealing with it for a while he said,
"Light of my life, I think I have it, then I don't."
"Luke, what did you just say?" I asked,
and he repeated himself. "Then why do we have the desk lamp on?" I asked.
"So we can see. Why else would we have
it on?"
"I can't understand you. You tell me
I am the light of your life, but you have a desk lamp on."
"You know what I mean. I don't mean
you are really a light."
"Oh, I see, you are using a metaphor.
Now I understand."
Luke had one of these "ah ha" moments
and said, "I see what you mean: life is a ball game, you are my life... Now
I see!"
His other problem was that the essay
would ask a question he couldn't answer. "In that case, Luke, you have to
rephrase the question to one you can answer and stick to it." We worked until
well after midnight and then went to bed. I was confident Luke would do well
and he certainly was more confident than he had been.
Gentle, soft kisses marked our good
nights then our hard, naked bodies became entwined and, after a final kiss,
Luke said, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, I love you so much, so very much."
Nestling my face in the crook of my
love's neck, I answered, "Yonghon Tongmu, those words make me the happiest
person on the face of the earth and my love for you is as boundless as the
universe." Moments later, I was dreaming of a perfect life with my Luke.
Part Thirty-three
Michael
Mary Kathryn came to supper with us
Saturday night and after supper we sat in the porch swing and talked for
ages about a lot of things. I finally told her what I had talked to Matt
about and how I had felt pressured to do and be something I was not. "I can't
understand why boys--and in my book they're boys--have to brag about having
sex. I mean, is it a game like basketball where you keep score?" she asked.
"I guess it's supposed to prove you're
a man. Being in love and loving someone physically, I mean having sex, is
never a part of the locker room talk. Just fucking."
"Well, I know some girls get pregnant
to prove they are a woman and some guy does the job to prove he's a man and
there's another child without decent parents. It's not about love. It's about...
well, it's just bullshit. So Matt thinks the women can put a stop to some
of the locker room talk. Who's the worst?"
"No question about that, it's Ronnie
Meyer. According to him, he gets laid at least seven times a week."
"His girlfriend is Melinda Howell,
right?" I nodded. "Well, she is a real firecracker and I expect there'll
be fireworks when she finds out." We talked a while longer, but not about
that. We talked about loving each other and how much we enjoyed kissing and
all that, then got in some practice before Margaret came out and announced
it was time for me to walk Mary Kathryn home. I knew the walk was going to
be more than a little bit painful because I had been hard for ages.
"I planned for her to spend the night
here, in my bed," I said.
"Think you better come up with a different
plan, young Michael," Margaret said.
"But I want to," Mary Kathryn said
in a very pouty voice.
"No doubt," Margaret said, "but it's
time to hit the road!" We all laughed and I started walking Mary Kathryn
home. The moon was only half-full but the sky was absolutely clear, so the
moon looked much brighter than I expected. As we walked, I had to stop from
time to time to look at my beauty's face in the moonlight--and to exchange
a few kisses. Just past Matt's place there's a huge old oak which arches
out over the road. When we reached it, I took Mary Kathryn by the hand and
we walked under the tree and I leaned against it and pulled her to me. The
moonlight shining through the leaves of the tree make a pattern on the face
which I often saw in my dreams. A gentle breeze moved the leaves, changing
the pattern on her face, teasing me as her lips, eyes and nose were highlighted
and then shadowed. The fantastic beauty before me took my breath away.
While we were on the porch, we did
some making out but it was pretty tame compared to what was happening under
the oak. The pressure of her body against mine made me even harder although
I thought that was impossible. Our lips were locked together and I found
myself breathing for the both of us. Well, not actually, but you know what
I mean; every breath Mary Kathryn took came from me. When she placed her
hand on the front of my pants and started rubbing my cock, I was in heaven!
As she continued, I felt myself approaching that point I have loved since
I discovered what I could do by rubbing and stroking my cock. Her touch became
a bit more intense and that did it. I was blinded by the climax that hit
me. I had to take my lips from hers as I was gasping for breath. When I had
recovered enough, I pulled her to me and whispered in her ear, "Mary Kathryn
Larsen, I love you, I love you!"
Mary Kathryn stuck her tongue in my
ear and when she removed it said, "If you ever think I don't love you, Michael,
remember... God, I don't know how anyone could love a man more, I don't care
how old they are." We stayed under the oak for a while longer, exchanging
tender kisses and telling each other of our love. Finally we started back
toward her house, our arms around each other, still exchanging kisses. Reluctantly,
there had to be a final--long, passionate, but final-- kiss on her porch
and I walked back to my place. Had anyone seen, there was plenty of evidence
I had had a wild woman in my arms. I went upstairs and got into the shower
to clean up and embarrassed myself when I realized I was singing at the top
of my lungs. When I started the third or fourth time, "More than the greatest
love the world has known," I yelled "YES!!"
Dad came rushing up the stairs to see
if something was wrong. When he knocked on the bathroom door and asked, "Are
you all right, Son?" I shouted through the door.
"YES!! I'm wonderful. Dad, I'm in love
with the most wonderful, the most perfect, the most beautiful, the most loving
woman in the whole wide world!"
Dad laughed and said, "I think I would
challenge that, Son, but I guess it would get me nowhere with you."
"Margaret's great, Dad, and I love
her to death, but she can't compare with my Mary Kathryn."
"Only a fifteen-year-old's opinion,
but it would be useless for me to argue," Dad said and laughed again.
I wrapped a towel around me and came
out of the bathroom, and Dad was standing in the hall laughing. "Seriously,
Dad, have you ever been in love as much as I am?"
"Twice in my life, Michael, and I can
tell you it's a wonderful feeling, especially when you are loved in return
as I have been by your mom and Margaret."
"And I am by Mary Kathryn."
"And as you are by Mary Kathryn," he
agreed. We gave each other a high five and Dad hugged me. "We are two damn
lucky men, Michael Andrews."
"Indeed we are! ... I meant to ask
earlier, Dad, where's Uncle Michael? I haven't seen him all weekend."
"Well, he just said he had some business
to attend to Friday and that he wouldn't be back this weekend. I think maybe
he's gone courtin'."
"And?"
"And I'm not sure, but when he left
he seemed almost as happy as his nephew was when he came back from a fifteen-minute
walk that took an hour. Good night, Son, and sweet dreams."
"Yea, sweet dreams... you won't have
to dream because you have your woman beside you. I don't think that's fair!"
I said in as pouty a voice as I could manage.
"A privilege of age, I guess. And since
when was life supposed to be fair?" Dad asked. I went to bed and dreamed
of my Larsen beauty, but I was also having some disturbing dreams which I
didn't understand. I kept dreaming that I was watching myself and couldn't
really see me. I saw Mary Kathryn holding a baby--which definitely was mine--but
I couldn't see me or who or what I was. It was puzzling.
Matt and Luke had their first AP exam
Monday--English--so I was surprised when they showed up for lunch. "How'd
you guys do?" Mary Kathryn asked. All the seniors of the Fellowship were
in AP English so they immediately started talking about the exam. All thought
they had done well.
"I wouldn't have done shit," Luke said,
"had Matt not coached me, but I am confident I did well. Certainly not a
five, but I'm pretty sure of a four". The others thought they did about the
same except Matt who said he had done ok and the exam was what he had expected.
He couldn't very well say what we all knew was true; he had probably aced
the test.
While we were talking about the exam,
Melinda Howell came into the cafeteria--stormed in would be more like it.
Mary Kathryn said, "Prepare for fireworks. I told Melinda that her boyfriend
Ronnie Meyer had been bragging about having sex with her and she exploded."
We all looked up and it was obvious Melinda was steaming. She walked--no,
rocketed would be more accurate--to the table where Ronnie was sitting with
some of his friends. When she reached it, she planted her feet about two
feet apart and practically shouted, "Ronnie, I'm through with you! You've
been bragging about having sex with me, you lying bastard! You have been
trying for ages and when I finally decided it was ok, you needle dick, you
couldn't get it up! That's as close as you ever came to having sex with me
and that's as close as you ever WILL get, spaghetti dick!" She then stormed
over to a table and sat down.
"Thanks, Matt. I see what you mean
about all talk and no action! Man, I bet there's a lot less talk in the locker
room from now on!"
Matt
After lunch, Luke and I went to the
office and checked out, taking advantage of the afternoon off provision of
the AP exam schedule. "Luke, when Michael talked to me about being kidded
because he was a virgin and almost sixteen, he had another problem. I think
in his nearly-sixteen-year-old mind, they were close in importance."
"Something as important as whether
or not to have sex with my baby sister?"
"In case you haven't noticed, lover
boy, your baby sister is hardly a baby any more--a babe, yes, a baby, no!
But yes, having sex with your sister."
"She loses her virginity before I do
and there is going to be big trouble," Luke said in a Jens voice.
"Don't think you have to worry about
that and I'm sure the kidding will stop after today," I laughed. "Besides,
I told him just to give the locker room guys a wicked Michael grin and say
something like, 'Man, if you only had what I have' and let the guys fill
in the blanks. Anyway, he's really concerned about a birthday present for
Mary Kathryn. Think we might buzz over to Mr. Swartz's place and take a look?"
"Sure. Why not?"
When we got to Mr. Swartz's shop, he
was delighted to see us. We told him our problem and he suggested earrings
which matched the central symbol on Mary Kathryn's ring. "Do you remember
what it is, Luke?" I asked.
"Yea, its the face of the corn maiden."
"Let me see what I have," Mr. Swartz
said and went in the back. When he came back, he had two trays, one of earrings
and one of bracelets. "Thought you might like to see the bracelets as well,"
he said as he placed the trays on the counter.
"Look at these," Luke said, holding
up a pair of earrings with a roadrunner on them. "Didn't Michael pick a ring
with a roadrunner?"
"Sure did. Man, that would be neat--earrings
to match his ring for his woman. Luke, my man, you are a genius. Mr. Swartz,
would you put those aside until we can talk to Michael? I'm sure he will
think they are a good idea and I would hate to have them gone if he wanted
them."
"Well, as you know, I have a good collection
and sold few until some teenagers with taste took a bunch of my lovely rings.
Now they are raiding my earring collection, it seems," he laughed. "Of course
I will hold them for Michael. Just have him call or come by."
When we left the shop, I asked Luke
if he'd like to hear a surprise I was preparing for Millie and he said he
would. We went by St. Mary's and I suggested we call the school and leave
a message for Michael that we had a project we needed him to help with, and
that I would pick him up. We did, and the secretary said she would give him
the message. "Make sure he understands he is to be the only one we will pick
up," Luke told her. As we were leaving the office, I said to Gertie, "Gertie,
I'm going to play something for Luke I have been working on as a surprise
for Millie. Now, for heaven's sake, keep quiet about it because it has to
be a surprise."
"You don't think I will hear it here
in the office, do you?" she asked, somewhat amused.
"I wouldn't be surprised! Just keep
it under your hat!" Luke and I went into the church and I told Luke to sit
in Millie's place--everyone knew where that was! "Luke, when I first started
taking organ from Millie, she would occasionally open up this Flentrop and
blast away with a piece I thought was great. Of course, when this monster
is opened up, it should be in a place at least twice the size of St. Mary's,
but Mr. Willingham insisted on having it. It has pipes that could have bird's
nests they are used so seldom, such as this one." I played a note on a 32-foot
pedal stop! In a small parish church, you just don't have a 32-foot stop,
but St. Mary's did! "When I first started taking organ from Millie--I was
only six ... remember that fuss?--Millie used to kid me saying, 'Matt, you
may be good, but don't think you'll ever manage this,' and she would cut
loose. Of course, when I started, I couldn't reach the pedal manual. In fact,
I couldn't even reach the swell pedal, so it was a pretty safe bet on her
part, but I think I can manage it now and I want to surprise my old teacher."
When Luke was in Millie's pew, I started and don't think I made a mistake.
When I finished, I got up and bowed as Luke stood applauding.
"Damn, Matt, that's something! I bet
Millie will wet her pants when she hears that! Babe, how would you like to
grab a burger and fries since we will need to pick up Michael, and if we
went home we'd almost have to turn around and come back."
"Sounds good."
We took our time eating and talking
and then went to the school where Michael was waiting for us. "Michael, don't
expect us to solve ALL your problems, but I think Matt and I have solved
the birthday present problem. By the way, your's is tomorrow and you have
AP history exam the following day. When's the celebration?"
"Well, Mary Kathryn's birthday is the
eighteenth and Margaret asked if we would like to have our celebrations together
and we did. But it seemed bad to have it the night before the concert, which
it would be if we had it the Saturday after her birthday, so the two of us
asked if it could be this Saturday night and that was fine with Margaret.
Uncle Michael asked about having it at his new place and we all asked, 'what
new place?' and he said he had seen an old house--you know one of those old
Victorian houses in Millie's neighborhood--along the river which had been
allowed to run down. Millie knew who owned it and told him how to approach
the owner--Millie had tried to buy it for years, but he hated Millie and
liked the idea that he had a run-down house in Millie's neighborhood. Uncle
Michael approached the man and told him he wanted to annoy Millie by moving
into her neighborhood and hinted that he was not the kind of people Millie
wanted living nearby. He bought the ploy and Uncle Michael bought the house
for next to nothing last week. It will have to have a lot of work done to
repair it and take care of other improvements he wants to make. He said he'd
like to have the celebration there. The house would be cleaned up and the
downstairs definitely usable, but not what it would be when he finished.
By the way, he told Dad he was doing some business last weekend and had other
plans so he wouldn't be home until Sunday night or Monday. When I asked Dad
what he was up to, Dad said he though he was 'going courtin' and that was
just a guess."
"Wonder who he's courtin'?" Luke asked,
then got a surprised look on his face. "You don't think it's Mr. Stephenson
do you?"
"I hadn't thought about it, but I wouldn't
be surprised," I said.
"I'm not sure. There's several years
difference in their ages," Michael said.
"Need I remind you that the same could
be said of your dad and Margaret?" Luke asked.
"Hadn't thought about that either.
I guess when I think about, say, five years, it seems huge. I mean Mary Kathryn
would be a middle school kid if there were five years' difference in our
ages. I guess it's a matter of how old you are. Wouldn't that be great, since
Uncle Michael has been without a partner for two years..."
"So has Mr. Stephenson," Luke added.
"Do you think there's something in the water on the farms? Seems love just
kinda busts out if you hang around out there. Well, here we are," Luke said
as we pulled up in front of Mr. Swartz's shop. "Matt and I came by today
and looked at some earrings I think you and Mary Kathryn would like."
When Mr. Swartz brought out the tray
of earrings, Michael started looking at them and picked out a pair with the
face of the corn maiden. "These match her ring," he said, but didn't seem
too enthusiastic about them.
"Here's the ones your friends thought
you might like." Mr. Swartz took a box from under the counter and opened
it to show Michael the ones with the roadrunner.
"YES!" Michael exclaimed. "That's it.
Her earrings would match my ring. Yes!, but I don't have the money with me,"
he said as his face fell.
"Matt and I thought of that, so we
got money from the ATM which we will loan you."
"Thanks, those are perfect."
"I'll wrap them for you," Mr. Swartz
said, and disappeared in the back of the shop.
"Thanks, guys, those are absolutely
perfect! What am I going to do next year without you two around?" Michael's
question touched a nerve since Luke and I still were scheduled to be on opposite
ends of the east coast next year.
Mr. Swartz came back with a beautifully
wrapped box and gave it to Michael, who took it with an almost worshipful
attitude. Luke and I paid Mr. Swartz and we walked to the Jeep, Michael carrying
Mary Kathryn's gift like it was the Holy Grail!
As we took Michael to his place, I
noticed Mom and Dad were home so Luke and I stopped by. I was having dinner
at the Larsens' and Luke and I were working on calculus. The AP exam was
Thursday and I really felt shaky about it. In fact, I was feeling so shaky
that Luke and I worked until midnight every night, spending more time on
calculus than English once he felt confident about English, and now English
was over we had really decided to work on calculus. We stopped each night
at midnight and piled into bed without a lot of playing around. I was so
tense that I was making him tense and we were still running, so we were getting
about six hours sleep. Wednesday, we picked up Michael and Mary Kathryn after
their AP exams. Both said they were confident they had done well. "How about
spending some time at the falls?" Luke suggested. "I think all of us could
do with some relaxing time." He had instant agreement.
"Just remember I have this week's only
practice this afternoon," I reminded the crew.
Mary Kathryn crossed the canes and,
when we had reached the beach, she said, "Guys, I feel like skinny dipping,"
and started undressing. Luke and I undressed each other, stopping for a kiss
or two. When we were undressed, Michael still had his boxers on and the tent
in them suggested why he was slow undressing. "Get 'em off, lover, and I'll
take care of your growing problem." Michael set a new world record for boxer
removal. Man, he had popped a great boner! Mary Kathryn laughed, grabbed
it and raced to the top of the falls and, without releasing Michael, dived.
They swam back to the beach and, when Michael got out, the river had done
its job. "Told you I'd take care of that boner," Mary Kathryn laughed.
"Well, that wasn't exactly what I had
in mind," Michael pouted.
"Better clean up your mind, Michael
Andrews," Michael's Larsen said as she kissed him good time.
"By the way, Michael, happy belated
sweet sixteen! I forgot yesterday."
"So did I. I was too busy worrying
about the AP exam and a few other things. Thanks."
"Matt and I have AP calculus exam tomorrow
so we'll be ready to leave after lunch--can't miss lunch with the gang these
days--so why don't you see if David will write you permission to check out
early and Luke and I will take you to get your driver's license."
"Hot damn! Man, I sure would like that!"
There was no question about the kids of the family getting their licenses
as soon as they turned sixteen. We started driving tractors on the farm before
we started school and were driving the farm trucks before we were twelve.
Nonetheless, we were all required to get our learner's permit when we were
fifteen and drive with the adults. Also, our parents required us to take
drivers education even though we were all good drivers. After we got our
licenses there were very strict rules about what we could and could not do.
And the rules were enforced! I got my Jeep for my seventeenth birthday and
shortly after, Luke and I were showing off in MickeyD's parking lot and Dad
saw us. Luke and I were grounded for six weeks and my keys were taken for
that time. We even had to ride the bus to school and we learned our lesson!
"The next time it will be six months," Dad told us, and we knew he meant
it.
We started swimming and diving again
and, after half an hour, we lay on the blankets in the warm sun. As much
as I might have wanted to make out with my man, I was asleep in minutes.
I suddenly waked up, wrapped in Luke's arms. I looked over at Mary Kathryn
and Michael and they, too, were wrapped in each other's arms, sound asleep.
I carefully freed myself and raised up on an elbow to look at my Luke. Honestly,
he was so magnificent he took my breath away. I leaned over him and pressed
my lips to his in a tender kiss. Luke opened his eyes, smiled and pulled
me atop his body as he returned my kiss. "Babe, I'd like to keep this up,
but I'm due at St. Mary's in half an hour."
"Then I guess we need to get dressed.
Look at my baby sister and our brother Michael," Luke said. I guess it sounds
silly to talk about a very well-developed sixteen-year-old man and an equally
well-developed not-yet-sixteen-year-old girl, both nude, wrapped around each
other looking innocent, but that was the only way to describe them.
"Matt, I know Michael talked to you
about the sex thing and a birthday present, but I think he has something
else going on. Have you noticed he seems distracted at times."
"I thought about it, yea, I think so.
Wonder what's bugging him?"
"Don't think he's having second thoughts
about his Larsen do you?"
"I think he's having second million
thoughts about his Larsen and all of them good--maybe naughty, but good.
No, I think, even though they are young--don't laugh, compared to us, they're
young--I think their love is on just about as solid ground as ours, Yonghon
Tongmu." I smiled, thinking about how Michael had carried Mary Kathryn's
birthday present. "I just don't know what, if anything, is going on with
him. I guess we'll know when he wants to tells us. Right now, I've got to
rush or I'll be late. But, first, watch this." I then yelled at the top of
my lungs, "Hi, Jens!"
Luke immediately saw what I was up
to and yelled just as loudly, "Hi, Dad!" Needless to say, Michael and Mary
Kathryn shot straight up.
"Damn you, I ought to bust your ass!"
Michael said, still red in the face from blushing. Mary Kathryn just pointed
at him and laughed.
"I've got to go, now that everyone
is wide awake," I said.
"Hold up a minute, Matt. I need to
go with you. I want to talk to Fr. Tom."
"Doubt he will be there, Lil' Bro.
He's seldom in the office this late in the day."
"Well, I kinda have an appointment,"
Michael answered.
"In that case, you better get some
clothes on." Michael quickly dressed and the four of us walked to my place.
Luke kissed me, Michael kissed Mary Kathryn and Michael and I got in the
Jeep.
As soon as we were under way, Michael
asked me, "Matt, do you think I am a religious person?"
"I don't know. What do you mean a religious
person?"
"Well, you know..."
"I'm not sure I do. If you mean what
most people mean by being religious, you know, a goody-two-shoes who is afraid
of doing something for fear it might be wrong or that others might disagree;
who works hard to make people think he is religious; who sees church as a
ticket to heaven; who shows up every time the church door opens, but you
would never know it by the way he treats people; then hell, no, you're not
religious. Thank God! In fact, no, I don't think you are a religious person."
"I think you are a full red-blooded
man who has a sense of right and wrong, of justice and injustice, far above
that of many adults and certainly almost all sixteen-year-olds. I think you
will stand up for what is right, seldom counting the cost to yourself. You
respect people--even those of us others condemn because we are different--and
you love and respect a woman and I mean both love and respect. You stand
by your friends at all costs, but aren't afraid to disagree or set them straight
when they are wrong. You love life and being alive, and don't let disappointments
or hurt destroy your spirit. You think deeply and, I suspect, engage in a
dialog with the whole of creation and your God. In my book, that makes you
a very religious person. No, that's wrong. A religious person, I think, is
what I described as a goody-two-shoes. You're not a religious person. You
are a spirit man, may even be called a spiritual man, but that's often taken
as being weak and you're not. You are a spirit giant and warrior."
"Wow! I just keep wondering about what
makes a person religious. I mean really religious and not just a church-going
bigot."
"Michael, I grew up in St. Mary's and
I have come to believe two things are important and the rest is window dressing.
The first is that loving God means loving and respecting your neighbors,
and that's everyone and everything from people to bunny rabbits to the falls,
to... everything. I guess I owe a lot of that to Dad and his Lakota background.
The second thing which is important is to remember nothing can separate me
from God's love of me... nothing! Don't get me wrong, I love church. I like
the ceremony of the liturgy. I love the music, the hymns, the bells and candles
and flowers and incense--the whole smear. I love them, but that's not being
a spirit man--religious maybe, but it's not important. For me, those things
help remind me of who I am--God's beloved son--and what I'm placed here to
do--to love people and to bring joy to as many as I can. So am I a religious
person? No, I hope not. Am I a spirit man. God, I hope I am and that I will
become more so."
"That's what I mean. I look at the
family and see what we have gone through--the pain and the joy--and how,
when the chips are down, we support and love each other and I say, 'That's
what being religious means." Then I think about all the hate spewed out at
the Temple of Praise--even if McBride hadn't done what we know he did--and
all the pain caused by the teachings Jens heard at Immaculate Conception
and following what is said to be religious. I get confused."
"Michael, I'm no expert, but anyone
who says that the love I have for Luke and he has for me earns God's hate
is full of shit! It's about loving and being loved, about accepting the way
life is and the people in it, and accepting your own acceptance. And that's
not religion and I want no part of being religious. That's spirit."
"You mean that, don't you?"
"You're damn frigging fucking right
I mean it."
"Matt, think you better stick to being
an expert on things spiritual and let me and Luke be the experts on things
filthy mouth," Michael laughed, then said, "Thanks, Bro."
I walked into the office with Michael
and Gertie said, "Hi, fellows. Michael, Fr. Tom is in his office. Matt, he
wants to see you before you go."
"Thanks, Gertie. See you after practice,
Michael."
Practice was almost flawless. We concentrated
on my two compositions and a couple other pieces which needed some work.
We decided we would do another practice the next day and then Tuesday, Wednesday
and Thursday of the next week since so many in the chorus and ensemble were
taking AP biology and AP chem tests. When we broke up, I went to the office
to see what Fr. Tom wanted. When I got there, Michael was still in his office,
but Gertie said Fr. Tom had instructed her to send me in as soon as I arrived.
I knocked on the door and walked in.
"Matt, good to see you. How did practice go?"
"Almost perfect. I am getting worried
that we might start getting cocky, things are going so well."
"Maybe I need to have Millie come around.
I'm sure she could take care of any cockiness!"
"Threat enough Father! Gertie said
you wanted to see me?"
"Yes." Michael started to get up. "Sit
still, Michael, nothing private about this. In fact, it may be of interest
to you and your family. Matt, Millie called the Bishop..."
"Oh, boy, Who's in trouble now?"
"Actually no-one I hope. She invited
him to the concert Saturday and he had a commitment at St. Paul's, Jackson,
Saturday morning and you know that means he has to be there. But he said
he was scheduled to be in Brevard at St. Matthew's Sunday, and that was so
far from Concord he didn't see how he could make it Sunday afternoon either.
But after all it was Millie who had called, he had to come up with something.
So he said since he was scheduled to be at St. Mary's June 4th, if I could
arrange to exchange visitation dates with St. Matthew's, he'd be here Saturday
night and stay over. Of course, that poses two problems--aside from getting
in the housekeeper in two days to clean up after me before he arrives! First,
you are so involved in the concert that it hardly seems fair to ask you to
prepare for the bishop at the same time, and second, that means I have just
over a week to prepare anyone for presentation and confirmation. Nevertheless,
I called St. Matthew's thinking Fr. All-Important-Cardinal-Rector--bit catty,
but true--would say definitely no but, unfortunately, the exchange suited
him fine since it allowed him to make the steeple chase which he MIGHT miss
if the bishop were there. So the ball's in our court."
"Don't think the music is any problem.
As I recall, the bishop is pretty much tone deaf anyway--at least he never
sings on key--and there are pieces I will be using in the concert I can use
for background music for the bishop."
"Not nice, Matthew."
"I wasn't the one who called Father
Bailey Father All-Important-Cardinal-Rector," I replied.
"Michael, I guess you think we're evil.
Actually, the bishop is a pretty strong person and a good man, but there
are priests who think they have a handle on God and they are the second incarnation
and they really, if you'll pardon the expression, piss me off. I think I
am a pretty good--actually, mediocre, but good--parish priest. I try to take
care of the people who look to me. I know I'm not overly important in the
scheme of things; I wish I were and had been braver at times, but never have
I thought I was special just because I wear a collar backwards. OK, Matt.
I'll see what I can do about confirmation. Know anyone interested?"
"I am and I suspect Dad and Margaret
are. Probably Mary Kathryn, but I don't know how Jens will take to that,"
Michael said.
"Think you can count in Luke and probably
Eugene and maybe Larry. Linda may even rope that lapsed Baptist she's hanging
around with into something like that."
"Well, you take care of the music and
Gertie and I will see who and what we can round up. By the way, Michael,
tell your uncle we received his letter of transfer from St. Michael's, Charleston.
I guess he must have decided he can take high church."
"Remember, he came to Charleston from
Chicago so I guess he thinks St. Mary's is kinda low, but he's closer to
home now than he was in lower-than-a-snake's-belly South Carolina brand of
churchmanship," I laughed.
I expected Michael to have some comment
about Fr. Tom's and my discussion or maybe even his talk with the priest,
but when we started home all he said was, "I guess I have some things I need
to think about. Maybe talk to you one of these days, Bro?"
"Anytime, Lil' Bro."
Michael was silent for a time and then
he said, "Matt, I keep having the strangest dream." He then told me about
his dream of Mary Kathryn and the baby and his being there and not being
there.
"That's strange, Michael. You know
I had a dream I had forgotten about until you mentioned Mary Kathryn and
the baby. Some time ago I dreamed Luke and I were having our commitment ceremony
and when I looked up, you were standing in front of us in full vestments
and I looked around and Mary Kathryn was breast feeding a baby which was
certainly your baby, but I thought about Mary and the Christ Child. Seems
similar to your dream."
"Scares the shit out of me, Luke. Me
a priest? I don't think so. Not in this lifetime."
"Remember when Millie said she couldn't
decide whether you were going to be a lawyer or a priest and you said you
wouldn't even think about it or something like that and Luke said you would
now?"
"Yea, I remember. Look Luke, keep all
this to yourself, ok. I'm just a little confused right now."
"More than a little confused, Lil'
Bro. You just called me Luke twice," I laughed, "but, sure, between us. Let's
drive by and take a look at the place Uncle Michael has bought."
"Great! He seems really excited about
it." When we reached the street, we passed the hospice where there were people
working on the landscaping--the house looked finished outside. A block later,
we passed one of the "smaller" Victorian houses--Dad had told me once it
was a "cottage" because it had "only" four bedrooms on the second floor and
a master suite on the first along with a living room, dining room, parlor
and kitchen. There were a number of workmen around it, but Uncle Michael
had described a much larger house so we drove on.
Two blocks later we saw all kinds of
vehicles and vans parked on the street and, as soon as we saw the house,
we knew why. There must have been a hundred people working outside. A group
was pruning old shrubs, getting them back into shape, while others working
on the landscaping were clearing away brush and debris. Another group was
preparing the lawn for new sod. A crew was down on the river building a new
dock and a gazebo. Several were working on installing a beautiful stone walk
from the house to the river. Roofing people covered the roof, making repairs
and painting the old pressed tin roof. A crowd who looked like spacemen in
their suits were busy blasting off layers of paint from the exterior walls
including the tons of gingerbread adorning the old house. The ornate iron
fence surrounding the property was almost completely repaired. "Man, it sure
must be costing a mint," Michael commented. "And look just how damn huge
that place is. But I am sure this is it. Just for Uncle Michael? It must
be great to be loaded."
"I can't wait to see the inside," I
said, "and your and Mary Kathryn's celebration will be here. Wow!"
When we got home, I told Dad and Mom
what was going on at Uncle Michael's and at the cottage. "And the bishop's
coming."
"Yea, I know about the bishop coming.
Fr. Tom called me to give me the news and to ask me to talk to Jens and Gabrielle
about Mary Kathryn," Dad said. "I was going to leave a message on their machine,
but Luke answered the phone. When I told him what I had called about, he
said he was ready to become a full-blooded Episcopalian. I told him to have
Jens call me. I have no idea how Jens will react to the possibility of Mary
Kathryn leaving the Roman Catholic Church." While we were talking, the phone
rang and Dad said it was for me. "Luke."
"Yea, Luke, what's up?"
"Matt, Mom called and she and Dad are
going to be late getting home. Some kind of meeting. She has called Yong
Jin about my eating at your place. I don't know why, after seventeen years,
she thought she needed to ask. Michael had already asked Mary Kathryn to
have supper there. He had something to talk with her about. All top secret
apparently. Anyway, I'll be coming over for supper. Do you want to start
work early on calculus? I know Greywolf will read us the riot act if we stay
up too late the night before a big test and I think just a little more and
you'll go in feeling confident."
"Luke, I think it would take a miracle
to make me feel confident but, yeah, come on and we'll do some work."
"Ok, on one condition: no playing around,
ok?"
"Well," I whined, "it's not ok ok,
but all right. No playing around. Strictly calculus."
"All right, Sarang Hanun Pomul, it
doesn't have to ALL be calculus, but mostly. I mean this is serious business."
"I know that, Yonghon Tongmu, and I
do want to make you proud of me."
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, you know I'd be
proud of you if you flunked calculus, but I don't like the idea of being
proud of a corpse and you would be one if you flunked the calculus AP! I'll
be right over. Till then, I love you, Babe."
"Same here, Babe."
It was about six-thirty when Luke arrived
and aside from a greeting kiss--which was not to be sneezed at--we hit the
calculus. We worked without stopping until Mom called us to dinner at 7:30.
A few things I had been confused about were now clear. Not only was Luke
a whiz at calculus, but also he was a great teacher. And, believe me, he
took it seriously!
We had a fairly leisurely supper and
when we started back upstairs, Dad said, "Guys, it's over at ten-thirty and
to bed. Luke..."
"I know, Greywolf, I planned to go
to my own lonely bed tonight."
"Daddy, why can't I have my play toy
to sleep with?" I asked in my best whiney little kid's voice.
"Because, Baby Matt, you don't have
a play toy to sleep with. You just keep playing around and don't go nighty
night," Dad responded in baby talk.
Promptly at ten-thirty, Luke stood
up, swept me into his arms and gave me a good night kiss that would certainly
make for good dreams, and went home. I quickly undressed and slipped into
bed, and thought about how hard he had worked to make sure I would do well
on AP calculus. He was right; he had made me pretty confident. Not only did
my nightly reflection give thanks for him and his love, but for the very
practical way he had shown that tonight.
At lunch, Luke and I were in a reversed
position from what we had been after the English exam. I said I thought I
had made a four and Luke said the test was what he expected. Michael and
Mary Kathryn were passing out invitations to their birthday celebration to
the Fellowship. As soon as the bell rang, I asked Michael if he were ready
and he said he was past ready. We checked out and went to get Michael's driver's
license.
The thing about the people who work
in the driver's license place is they think they are doing you a great favor
rather than remembering they work for you as a taxpayer so they are never
in a rush. There were not many people waiting in line when we got Michael
there, but it was obvious it would take longer than need be. It took an hour
to get Michael up to the desk, take the written exam and do his road test,
but it was finally over. He had his brand new license and I let him drive
the Jeep. We still had about two and a half hours before practice, so we
went to MickeyD's to celebrate. When we had our burger, fries and coke, we
went to a local drugstore which still had an old fashioned soda fountain
and had a double thick, double malt shake. I mean a real shake. MickeyD's
burger may be passable, but fake milkshakes are a crime. When we finished,
I suggested we show Luke Uncle Michael's place. As we drove up, Uncle Michael
was standing in front, directing some men who had started to paint the outside.
When we walked up he said, "Hi, Guys.
Didn't expect to see you this time of day." We told him we had done the AP
calculus exam and were free and David had given Michael permission to check
out to get his license. Michael proudly produced it for Uncle Michael to
examine. "Well, since you're here, would you like a tour? I'm afraid the
inside is a mess with all the work going on, but it'll be presentable by
Saturday, Michael. At least the important part will be." As we entered the
house he told us its history. It had been built by a tobacco baron who had
twelve kids. The downstairs--living room, parlor, dining room--were huge
and had 14-foot ceilings. The kitchen, which was through a large butler's
pantry, was also huge. There were also three large--actually huge--bedrooms,
each with a sitting room. "The old man's mother lived with him. In fact she
outlived him, according to stories, to spite his wife who took her darling
baby boy," Uncle Michael laughed. "These will be redone with wider door openings,
and made into a gallery--I may sell some things, but mostly it will be showing
things I have acquired and local artists' work. Luke, if there is anything
left unsold after your exhibition, I want to put all of it on display if
you will. I'm pleased there is already an outside entrance so people can
come without having to go through private space."
"Let's go upstairs." There were wide,
very ornate stairs leading to a second-storey landing with doors on either
end. "There are six bedrooms on each side of the staircase. The six through
that door, the north side of the house, were the boys' and there is an outside
staircase because boys will be boys, you know, and if daddy didn't know they
were bringing in women, it didn't happen. Or maybe they brought in men and
daddy certainly wouldn't want to know that! The first three will be turned
into a studio and storage space for local artists. The back three, which
will be closed off from the front three, will be another private studio and
darkroom--reached from the private part of the house. The six on this side,"
Uncle Michael said as he opened the door, will be our... my space. I like
what Millie did for her son's wing and I'm planning something similar. A
large sitting room, library/music room, a huge bedroom and a large bathroom
with a separate toilet--that's a Japanese idea we should definitely adopt!
A doorway will lead to the private studio on the other side of that wall.
Work will start here as soon as the carriage house is done."
"There's a carriage house?" Luke asked.
"A very nice one, almost identical
to the one in Chicago. It brought back wonderful memories. I had thought
about living there myself--to remember earlier days--but events have changed
my mind. As a matter of fact, it is almost finished--living room, dining
area and kitchen downstairs and large bedroom with bath and a studio upstairs.
I do expect to move into it this weekend or the middle of next week at the
latest. I will be there until my place in the big house is completed. Michael,
you're getting the guest room back."
"The studio area will be the last renovation
since it will change the roof and outside to admit light. Well, actually,
the skylights are being installed as the roof is repaired. Lots of renovation
and changing to be done."
"Wow!" was all I could say. Luke and
Michael, well, you know what they said, "Holy shit!"
"After you move into the big house,
what's to happen to the carriage house?" Luke asked.
"I hope to have an artist in residence
to offer classes and exhibitions to the community. That artist will have
a small stipend to take care of his--or her--personal expenses, the carriage
house, and freedom to take paying students as he or she wishes. Actually,
not a bad deal for a young artist and it could add greatly to the life of
the community."
"Can I sign up as the artist in residence?"
Luke laughed.
"Actually, I thought you might like
to do that in the summers while you are in college, seriously. And I guess
we could even have a musician in residence. Same residence I suspect," Uncle
Michael smiled.
"Uncle Michael, do you know what's
going on at the cottage down the street," Michael asked.
"Sure do. It's a kind of bed and breakfast
for people who need to be near the hospice which is just down the street.
When you have people you love dying, you need to be close and you need a
comfortable place to stay where you don't have to worry about anything. Just
before he died, I asked James to put a sizable amount of money into a trust
fund to, in a manner I decided, benefit a hospice. That fund will enable
making the cottage very pleasant and provide for food and a cook and housekeeper
to take care of people without cost. The upstairs will have two rooms for
guests and the downstairs will have four. The upstairs will also have an
apartment for, I hope, a couple who will serve as housekeepers and cooks
for the James Sanders Hospitality House. Luke, I want a nice sculpture in
the front of the cottage. Be thinking about whether or not you would take
a commission to do one."
"Think I just might. I might even have
one that would kinda sum up what that place is about, "Luke said with a sly
grin.
"Well, I really wasn't hinting," Uncle
Michael said, then added, "Well, to be honest, I was. I agree, it sums up
what I want that place to be. Think about it."
"If you're not busy, maybe we can talk
about that and the exhibition while Matt's at practice, that is if you aren't
anxious to get somewhere Michael."
"Well, I had thought I just might,
possibly, maybe, be allowed to drive the Jeep to school, but that's ok."
"It's ok with me if it's ok with Luke,"
I said.
"You can drop me off here and come
back after you go to school provided if you pick up a woman you keep your
hands off her and she keeps her hands off you." Luke sounded very serious.
"Well, holy shit, Luke, I may as well
not go."
Luke laughed and said, "Go ahead, baby
brother and be careful with my baby sister!" Michael gave the big YES and
tossed the keys in the air.
"Luke, you may as well stay here. Michael
can drop me off at St. Mary's. We'll be by after practice." As I walked into
St. Mary's, I wondered if Uncle Michael made a slip? I was sure he said,
"This will be 'our'..." and quickly changed it to "...'my' space" when he
showed us the upstairs. And there was a small private studio--with a darkroom.
I think David was right about who Uncle Michael was courting." I soon forgot
that as practice began, a practice which demonstrated there was no place
for cockiness on any of our parts. We sucked!
When I got home, I was just about exhausted.
The bad practice took more out of me than two good ones would have done.
I must have shown my condition because, when Luke and I walked in, Mom said,
"Bad practice I see".
"It really was terrible. Nothing seemed
to go right. Afterwards we decided we would practice tomorrow and have parents
pick up their kids because we are going to run straight through the whole
program, then work on the really bad spots. I don't know what was wrong,
but I know it was bad."
"Maybe bad rehearsal, good performance,"
Mom said, trying to comfort me.
"Sure. In that case we should really
be great. I'm going upstairs."
"Supper in an hour or so," Mom said.
"I'll call you."
Luke and I went upstairs with his arm
holding me close. When we got to my room he said, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, you
had two good practices so don't let one get you down."
"Luke, if it had been the first with two good ones following, I would have
been elated, but this way... well, if you do a painting and it is good, it
stays good. If it's bad and you do it over and it becomes good, it stays
good. Good paintings don't become bad paintings. Concerts do. I really feel
terrible. I have a blasted headache; think the practice might have been my
fault. I just..."
Luke took me in his arms, kissed me
gently and said, "Dark Angel, you need some loving".
"Luke, you're not going to believe
this, but I just don't feel like making out."
"I didn't say you needed to make out.
I said you needed some loving," he responded as he started undressing me.
When I was in my birthday suit, he picked me up, put me on my bed and undressed
himself. I was so down when I saw his naked body I didn't get hard. I really
was down! He lay beside me, wrapped his arms around me and pulled my body
to his. Holding me, he kissed me gently as he loosened my hair. With his
free hand, he stroked my hair as he sang softly, "More than the greatest
love...". Resting my face in the crook of his neck, held securely in his
arms, I drifted off to sleep.
Part Thirty-four
Larry
I reviewed the plans for setting up
the audio and video I had done. Of course I wouldn't know exactly how good
a job I had done until we could check it out. I planned to meet Friday with
the engineers so we could look over the actual building. We would start setting
up the systems Monday after school. If all went well, we would tape a couple
of the practice sessions and make any necessary changes and adjustments.
When I had finished, I left a note for Mom and walked over to Eugene's to
use his computer to fax the plans to the engineers of the Lexington PBS station.
Millie met me at the door and asked
if I could spare a few minutes. She got cokes and we went to the library.
"Larry, I'm worried about Eugene. When he came in from practice, I asked
how it went and he said, 'Shitty, Mom, absolutely shitty. Think I was
responsible. I'm going to take a nap.' He went upstairs and a few minutes
ago, when I checked, he was asleep. I'm really worried about what he
might do. Would you please spend the night with him? I am really worried."
"You know I don't have to be begged
to spend the night with Eugene, but what's wrong? He has said nothing to
me."
"You mean he didn't tell you about
the letter he got yesterday?"
"I know nothing about a letter. What
letter?"
"He got a letter from the DA yesterday
asking him to be at the courthouse at 9:00 Saturday and plan to spend four
to six hours looking at tapes in preparation for McBride's trial. McBride's
attorney has managed to get the trial scheduled quickly--don't know what
strings he pulled to get that done. It's scheduled for the week after the
concert. Eugene is beyond upset over having to look at those tapes--who wouldn't
be? And he is still worried about how you will react, what you will think
of him after you see them. I made sure you could go with him, but I wonder
if he has decided against that since he said nothing to you."
"Millie, you know I love Eugene. If
he was a willing participant in some wild sex with McBride now, I would have
real problems with it. I'm not sure I could handle it. But that's not the
question. McBride raped him... I can't understand how he can love me after
what I did to him, but he does. I know he does. I feel like shit every time
I think about what I did to him, but most of the time I can put that behind
me and just love him and accept his love for me. I have to be there when
he has to watch those tapes and relive the terror of six years ago. I have
to be."
"I'm glad you're here, Larry, let your
mom know you'll be here tonight. I don't want Eugene to do something foolish
again."
I called Mom as soon as I thought she
would be home and told her what was going on. While Millie was seeing to
dinner, I went upstairs, faxed the plans, then went to the bedroom to get
Eugene. He never completely waked up, but said, "I don't want dinner." When
I told Millie, she said we should just let him sleep.
After dinner, Millie asked about the
taping of the concert and Luke's exhibition. "It's as good as it can get
on paper. Unfortunately, paper is not the actual space. So many things
can go wrong when you start dealing with what is--rather than what you thought
was."
"Just like life," Millie mused. "Well,
you've got to do a good job. Don't want to put pressure on you, but a good
job is important to your future and your future with Eugene." Millie sighed
and said, "I don't know what I would have said if I had wanted to put pressure
on you! But this concert is really critical for the lot of you. Try to get
some sleep. It's early, but I'm going to my room and read."
"I'll go up. I probably should do some
school work but, to tell the truth, everyone's just coasting now--well, Eugene
and I do have AP physics next week, but right now I think I better make sure
he's ok. Millie, when will everything settle and be normal?"
"I guess you're adult enough to know,"
Millie smiled, "This is normal. When things settle down, people will be saying
how natural you look as they peep into your coffin! Well, I'll admit things
do settle down a bit more than they have been the last month or so but, no,
normal does not exist. Take care of my boy and yourself," she said and stood.
I hugged her tightly. As I did, she said, "Even with all the hurt and pain,
I wouldn't trade what you kids have given me for anything."
"I don't think we would have made it
without you, Millie. You're super!" I hugged Millie again and went upstairs.
When I reached the room, I looked at
my love who was sleeping, but hardly peacefully. He was tossing and turning,
muttering in his sleep. My heart ached for him as I undressed and got ready
to slide into bed beside him. As I turned the cover back, I saw Eugene was
still dressed. I debated what to do, then decided to undress him. He couldn't
be comfortable. I expected him to wake up, but he didn't. When he was
undressed, I slid into bed and spooned into his back, hugging him to me.
Eugene turned over, pulled me close and kissed me hard. "Larry, hold me.
Hold me tight. Let me know you love me," he muttered. I did as he asked and
soon he was asleep again, but not as fitfully as before. It took me a while,
but I finally drifted off.
Paula
The practice was terrible! It started
off poorly as Eugene didn't seem to be with us. After he made a couple of
blunders, Matt started making mistakes. That, of course, threw the chorus
off. The practice just grew worse and worse until there was no way I could
not be affected. We finally just stopped and talked about what was going
wrong. Jackson, as always, spoke up quickly. "Frankly, we suck. I don't know
why, but we're not working together. I don't know the reason, but unless
we get it together, we better hang it up." There were heads nodding all over
the place. "I know it may be hard for some and we probably all want to have
Friday to party, but there's lots riding on this. I suggest we have a practice
tomorrow after school--not only to get ourselves together, but also to get
the program together. We've never done the whole thing as a single program."
"The only problem I have with that
is getting people home. I don't think Greywolf and Mr. Allan would mind bringing
everyone, but I doubt they'd be interested in hanging around to take everyone
home. After all, they are doing it for free," I reminded the group.
"I guess parents might be able to pick
up some of us and some of us can drive. I'd be happy to take some home. How
many of you will have a problem arranging a way to get home?" Jackson asked.
Several hands went up. Looking at who had a hand up, Jackson said, "Eugene,
you, Matt and I could take care of those can't we? Even if we have to make
two or three trips." There was no reason I couldn't, so I nodded as
did Eugene. "Ok, practice from 4:30 until we finish--not before 7:30, I'd
think," Jackson said.
When I got home, Mom asked how practice
went and I told her. "I don't know what happened, but I'm sure something
is going on with Eugene. I hope it's something he can handle quickly because
if he's not all right, there's no way Matt and I can carry the concert. We're
having a practice tomorrow and go through the whole concert without stopping,
then go back and work on the bad places. Don't expect me home until 8:00."
David
I got off work about 4:30 Friday and
decided to go by and see how Michael's house was coming. I got the grand
tour and, when we had finished, we went out back to the carriage house. "I
think it will be finished this weekend and I planned to move in here, but
I have run into a problem. I thought about the great memories I had of living
in the carriage house in Chicago, but got reminded--very quickly--that this
isn't Chicago and I'm not that young man."
"Michael, I need to talk to you about
something. I guess it's kinda the same thing. Last night as Elizabeth--I
mean Margaret, of course..."
"Give me the details since you have
just given me the problem," Uncle Michael said and he wasn't smiling.
"Margaret and I were in the kitchen
fixing supper when she said, 'Damn, this kitchen just isn't right!' and I
said, 'It's always been fine before.' Margaret looked at me with fire in
her eyes and said, 'It was fine for Elizabeth, David, but I'm not Elizabeth!'
I was more than a little taken aback and suddenly I remembered all the times
I had done what I just did--call Margaret Elizabeth. After dinner, I walked
through the house and thought about when Elizabeth and I had decided on this
color for a room, that piece of furniture, that picture, this arrangement
of something and realized I was comfortable in the house because it had been
the way it is for years. The more I thought about it, the more I realized
that Margaret couldn't move in the house without being reminded she was--it
sounds terrible, but you know what I mean--a replacement. Well, I know she's
not and I love her dearly. Of course I still remember and love Elizabeth,
but what I need is a real new start, not just a replacement for Elizabeth.
Does that make sense?"
"Painfully so, I'm afraid. And a good
reminder which I needed. So what do you want to do?"
"I had thought about just selling the
place and moving, but I don't think I could stand that and I have Michael
to consider. I guess what needs to be done is to have the whole house redone--new
paint, wallpaper, new furniture and definitely a new kitchen. But then there's
Michael to consider and money. It will cost a bundle and I don't make that
kind of money."
"How about Margaret? She definitely
makes good money. I have visited a doctor a few times," Michael laughed.
"I kinda hate to do that."
"Got a problem with a wife who makes
more money than you do?"
"Actually, I would say otherwise most
of the time, but, yea... no. I mean I don't have trouble with her making
the money, but I'll admit I have trouble when she spends her money for something
I think I should provide."
"Sounds to me as if you two need to
talk about the difference between 'ours' and 'yours and mine'. James and
I had a problem until one day he sat me down and asked very pointedly, 'Michael,
are we partners or are we two individuals who like to play around in the
same bed?' That hit me between the eyes big time. I realized that by thinking
'his and mine', I was keeping us apart. You need to think about that. What
do you need to do now? Having just had a similar problem tossed in my lap,
I remembered what James had said, 'We're in this together or we're not. If
we're together, it means there's no yours and mine; it ours and we make decisions
together.'"
"You're telling me you have a new partner?"
"No, I'm telling you you have a wife,
not a bed partner. You also have a son. Talk to Margaret and tell her you
are aware of a problem which can destroy your relationship--and it can--and
make a decision as to what to do about redoing the house. And you and Margaret
need to get Michael in on that as well. He's a part of the picture as well
as you two--at least for a couple more years. If money is a problem, I won't
give it to you. I don't think that will be helpful. I'll loan it to you interest
free and with a repayment plan you can live with, but if Margaret wants to
pay for it all, then you need to think about that. In fact, I suggest you
pool your income--common bank accounts, common decisions about how to spend
it. As a token repayment for the time I have lived at your place--and it
looks like I will be living there for a while longer now--I'll be happy to
work with the two of you in finding things, locating dependable workmen,
directing work--what I am doing here."
"Michael, I am so relieved. I guess
I don't show it often, but I was really upset. I love Margaret as much as
I loved Elizabeth and I could see a wedge growing between us over something
which seemed unimportant to me, but I see now it was very important to her.
Thanks, big brother."
"You're welcome, little brother. That's
what big brothers are for. And you don't realize how much having my little
brother means to me."
"Got a phone here?"
"I got one put in the day I closed
on the house. It took some fancy footwork, but I got it done because I knew
I'd be making a million calls a day as soon as the work got started. It's
right over there."
I called Margaret's office and told
the receptionist I'd hold when she said Margaret was with a patient.
Several minutes later Margaret's voice
said, "David, is something wrong?"
"Yes, but nothing that can't be fixed.
When will you be free?"
"I have one more patient then I'll
be leaving."
"I'm picking you up. Michael can come
by and get your car."
"Ok, but what's going on?"
"A lot I think you'll like," I laughed,
"but you'll just have to wait."
I picked up Margaret and asked if she
would like to see Michael's place.
"Sure, but is that what all the mystery
is about?"
"No. I told you you'd just have to
wait about the mystery," I laughed. I enjoyed keeping Margaret guessing.
Michael gave us the grand tour and
Margaret was full of suggestions. "But I guess you don't really need any
suggestions and certainly not a woman's touch," she finally laughed.
"Says who?" Michael responded. "You've
made some exciting suggestions and I certainly appreciate having a woman's
touch--when it comes to renovations and decorations. I'll admit that I can
do without it very well in the bed," he laughed and Margaret blushed big
time. "I didn't know doctors could be embarrassed!"
"You need to learn, Michael, that sometimes
I'm just a woman--not a doctor," she responded.
"Don't think I am the only one who
needs to realize that!" Michael said and gave me a sharp look.
When we had completed the tour, we
drove to the farm and I asked Margaret, "Feel up to a short walk?"
"It's afternoon, so sure."
"What does that mean?"
"It means I feel up to a walk in the
afternoon, but not necessarily in the morning. What do you think it means?"
"Frankly, I haven't the foggiest. But
would you like to walk to the falls? I need to talk."
"Always," she responded. I grabbed
a blanket and we walked across the meadow, hand in hand. I crossed the canes
when we reached the path to the falls. On the beach, we sat down on the blanket
and were both silent for several minutes just enjoying the sound of the falls,
the river and the birds. Finally I broke the silence. "Margaret, I need talk,
ok?"
"Ok."
"Remember last night when you said
something about the kitchen and I said it had always been fine?" She nodded
without speaking. "And the times I have called you Elizabeth?" Again she
nodded. "Well, today when Michael was showing me around his place, he talked
about moving into the carriage house because of the carriage house in Chicago.
I then told her about our conversation. "Margaret, I am sorry. I love you,
Margaret Bailey Andrews, but I have treated you as a replacement for Elizabeth.
You said you are not and I never expected you to be, but I have treated you
as if you were. I want us to sit down and decide how to make the house our
home."
Margaret grabbed me around the neck
and gave me a big-time kiss as tears filled her eyes. "Thank you, David.
I would like to say it didn't matter, but it does, it has. It has been creating
a feeling in me I didn't like."
"Margaret, if it's necessary, we can
sell the farm..."
"Never! That farm and the falls and
the family are a part of me now. And we're not going to do anything without
Michael. He is as much a part of us as if he were mine."
"But he'll only be here two more years..."
"David, he must NEVER think that I
am trying to replace his mother. I neither want nor will I tolerate anything
that suggests that, even if he were only going to be here for two weeks.
While I'm sure we can work out anything else, but there is one thing about
which I am adamant. The downstairs bedroom has to go!"
"Well, I guess since it was mine and
Elizabeth's..."
"Not OUR bedroom, the other downstairs
bedroom."
"No problem. It's been little more
than storage space for years and I can see why you might want to do something
with it."
"I don't want to do something with
it. Something must be done about it and before too long."
"Whatever you say. What do you want
to do with it?"
"I told you it's not a want. It's a
need." Margaret's eyes were sparkling, a smile hovered about her lips and
she finally said, "It's going to be a nursery."
I must have been spaced out because
I said, "Well, I see no reason why, or why not if you wish, but..."
"You may be sharp in other ways, David
Andrews, but I guess I'll have to spell it out. It NEEDS to be a nursery
because you are going to have a child to put in it."
I'm sure I looked stunned then I stammered,
"You mean..."
"About the only thing I can mean. I'm
pregnant."
"But I didn't think you could know
this quickly. I mean..."
"David, I guess if you want to put
it that way, I am pregnant with your love child. Remember a certain day here
at the falls BEFORE we said 'I will' we kinda did?"
I looked at Margaret, half unbelieving,
but thought back to the mornings she was in the bathroom longer than usual,
and to her comment about walking in the afternoon and morning, and I realized
what she said and I had heard was the way it was. I pulled her to me
for a long, tender kiss. When I released her, I said, "Margaret, when you
mentioned getting pregnant that day--my God, the day you did--I felt like
I was too old, and I may be, but no-one could convince me right now. I am
so happy--dense maybe, but happy. Damn, I'm going to be a father again and
Michael will have a brother..."
"Or sister. That I don't know yet.
Not sure I want to know. At least not right now, but why don't you make mad,
passionate, animal love to your new child-to-be's mother?" I didn't need
a second invitation. Well, actually, I needed to be reminded that sex with
a pregnant woman didn't hurt her or the baby. Of course, I knew that, but
I guess the old testosterone, male protective mode kicked in. But I liked
the way Margaret made me remember!
When we had finished making love we
lay, naked, holding each other until the sun moved behind the trees and the
shade covered us. No longer warmed by it, we dressed and walked back to the
house, hand in hand. As we walked, I asked Margaret when we should talk to
Michael, "Before or after dinner?"
"How about between those two? We still
have dinner to prepare unless some elvies have done it while we had fun at
the falls," Margaret laughed.
"You had fun? I thought I was being
very serious."
"David, having sex with you is always
serious fun!" Margaret laughed, stood on her tiptoes and kissed me.
Matt
When Luke and I got out of school,
he asked if I could go home with his mom. Seems he had a message from Uncle
Michael telling him the packing experts wanted to meet with him to look at
the task they had in crating the pieces for the exhibition. "I told Uncle
Michael I planned to put them in the van and haul them to St. Mary's. He
got a look on his face as if I had suggested throwing the Mona Lisa in the
back of a van and driving her around Concord," Luke laughed.
"No problem. But this is Friday and
Dad and Mr. Allan are bringing the kids to practice and it is up to us to
get home. It will probably be close to eight before we finish since
we are planning a complete run through and then, if necessary, going over
the worse parts. I was supposed to take some kids home, but maybe..."
"When will you finish?"
"Probably between 7:30 and 8:00."
"No problem. At least I hope. I'll
try come by at 7:30."
"Ok, but not before!" When we reached
the parking lot, I tossed Luke the keys and, before he walked around to the
driver's side, he kissed me big time. "Luke, you've got to stop that! All
Independence will know!"
"Matt, I've about reached the point
where I don't care what people know. Well, actually I do. You're right,"
he sighed.
When I got to St. Mary's, I decided
I'd do a strictly Bach program for the bishop's visitation and I had plenty
in the concert. Selecting the hymns was fairly easy as Gertie had pulled
the service bulletin from his last visit. I just made a few changes and gave
the new schedule to Gertie. That out of the way, I decided to take a walk
before practice. I wasn't very anxious to get started on that!
As I walked by Mr. Swartz's shop, he
was sweeping the sidewalk. I suddenly recalled a thought I had earlier and,
when he finished, we went inside. "A problem solved," I thought as I walked
out.
When I got back to St. Mary's, Dad
and Mr. Allen were just pulling into the parking lot with a load of singing
and laughing students. I only hoped their mood would continue. Eugene and
Luke drove up just as a car marked with the call letters of the PBS station
pulled into the parking lot. When a couple guys got out, Larry walked over
and shook hands with them. Eugene explained, "Larry faxed the plans he had
drawn up for the recordings yesterday and he was to meet the engineers here
this afternoon. He has promised they would not interfere with the rehearsal.
Matt, Paula, I need to talk to the group before we start." He was very serious
and looked troubled.
"Sure, no problem," we said.
The kids became quiet as they entered
the church. When we started rehearsals, I had explained how Episcopalians
felt about the church and that I would appreciate it if they would respect
it by leaving the horse play at the door. "Of course, this not a service
so feel free to talk when we are not working, but just talk quietly if you
would. Also, I know few of you are Episcopalians or Roman Catholics but,
when we enter the church, we usually kneel and spend a few minutes in prayer.
I do, even when I come just to practice. No-one expects you to do so but,
out of respect for anyone who might, let's agree to have three or four minutes
from the time we get in until we start. Ok?" There was complete agreement
and the kids had respected that and some did kneel for a short prayer--I
noticed that more and more of them were.
As Paula, Eugene and I went inside,
several kids were kneeling. After a few minutes, the last one got up and
came up front. "Before we start, I have something I need to say," Eugene
said as all the group got quiet. "Our last rehearsal was terrible," he began
and there were many nods of agreement. "I want to apologize for that since
basically it was all my fault. I was very distracted and started making mistakes.
As you saw, that was catching--soon Paula and Matt were making mistakes.
When that started, we ceased being a group, being together. I was distracted
because I had a difficult decision to make and it was the only thing I had
on my mind. As closely as we have been working, I think you deserve an explanation."
Eugene then told them about the whole rotten mess with McBride. Before he
was halfway finished, all the girls were crying and about half the boys were
teary-eyed. By the time he was finished, there wasn't a dry eye in the house.
Even the two engineers working with Larry were misty-eyed and Larry was weeping
silently. "So that's it. That was why I was distracted. Having made my decision
about testifying, I have my shi... stuff together, so let's practice." But
practice was not to be until there was a fifty-person group hug. Well, actually,
about fifty people hugged Eugene two or three at a time and the guys were
perhaps more demonstrative than the girls.
I had heard that tragedy brings people
together and it certainly seemed to bring this group together. We were really
tight and made so few mistakes I couldn't believe it. It was impossible to
imagine the group rehearsing Friday afternoon was the same as that which
sounded so bad the day before. For the first time, we ran straight through
the entire program, stopping only for the fifteen-minute intermission as
we would during the performances. When we finished, I said, "Ok, you have
kept one secret well, can I trust you with a new one?" There were loud shouts
of agreement. "I will play a piece as a surprise for Millie who was my organ
teacher. It will not be on the program and I will play it after you leave
for the intermission. I guess you can use it as a "going to the potty" piece.
Besides, it will give you five or six minutes before the crowd hits the johns.
I need to warn you, you may need earplugs." I started the piece and, when
I had finished, the group started applauding, whistling and shouting.
After the students had gone, Paula
and I met with Eugene and Paula hugged Eugene and said, "Eugene, what you
did saved the concert, no doubt about it. This group is now together as it
was not before and as it never would have been had you not done one of the
bravest things I have ever seen. Thank you and, please, let me and Matt know
any way we can help you though a really rocky time."
"Thanks, Paula, I knew I had to do
what I did, otherwise I would have had no credibility with the musicians.
It was hard, but their support will make tomorrow easier."
As we finished, Larry and the two engineers
walked up. Larry introduced them as Mr. Steinbeck and Mr. Greentree. Mr.
Greentree said, "Eugene, what you did this afternoon was one of the bravest
things I have ever witnessed a young man doing. I admire your courage
and your willingness to fight for justice."
"I agree," Mr. Steinbeck said. "And,
I would add, I can't believe the sound you got out of your ensemble. But
that goes for you as well, Paula. And Matt, if your old teacher isn't impressed
with the rest of your part in this concert, she should be with that display
you are putting on for her."
"How did your work go?" Eugene asked,
since he had recovered from his embarrassment before Paula and I.
"Splendid, splendid," Mr. Greentree
said. "Larry's plans seemed to be almost perfect. Of course, all we did today
were meter readings, but I think we'll get a fantastic recording out of this.
We'll record both concerts and that way, should something go wrong such as
a mike failing or some other technical difficulty, we'll have a backup. >From
what I heard today, there'll be no need to have a back up because of a failure
on the part of the musicians. I still find it hard to believe that this concert
is not only with student musicians, but also directed by students and much
written and arranged by high school students. My son is in middle school
and plays in the band and it is terrible. I am giving serious thought to
moving to Concord if this is the kind of music that comes out of Independence."
"As I recall, music isn't the only
reason I would like to have a kid at Independence," Mr. Steinbeck said. "As
a matter of fact, it was halfway through the program before I could remember
where I had seen you four. All of you were a part of that service held here
at St. Mary's." We all nodded. "Well, that should make a lot of people come
running to Concord."
Larry needed to spend a bit more time
with the engineers, so Eugene and I started driving kids home. Luke hadn't
shown up, but Gertie gave me the keys to the church van which made only one
trip necessary. Larry was still working with the engineers so Eugene and
I sat on the church steps talking while waiting for Luke to show up. I told
Eugene how much I admired him for what he was doing and if there was any
way I could help, to let me know. "I just hope I'm up for Michael's party
tomorrow night after looking at those tapes," he said as Luke pulled up.
It seems he had gotten so involved with the packing problem he had let the
time slip up on him.
Margaret
When David and I got back to the house,
Michael was obviously home because we could hear his music before we opened
the front door. David stood at the bottom of the stairs and shouted, "Michael!"
about four times before the music was turned down and Michael answered. "Could
you come down? We need to talk." Michael came bounding down the stairs two
at a time--his usual. I had asked David about that since it seemed dangerous
to me, and he had said he had given up long ago trying to get Michael to
walk down the steps rather than going into freefall.
"Michael, Margaret and I are going
to prepare supper, but we'd like to talk with you at the same time if you
don't mind," David said.
"Sure."
"Michael, I went to see Uncle Michael's
place today and, while I was there..."
"Some place, huh, Dad?"
"It sure is but, anyway, while I was
there he opened my eyes to something. He made me realize I hadn't treated
Margaret right."
"You mean he made you realize that
you were treating Margaret like a plug-in replacement wife, bringing her
here into what is a kind of memorial to Mom? Frankly, I was afraid I was
going to have to have a talk with you about that, but kept hoping you'd wake
up. Margaret, I thought you would have put your foot down and not moved in
until he did something."
"Like what? Sell the farm and move
into a new place?"
"Well, I had hoped it wouldn't have
to be that drastic since it would take us away from the family and the falls
but, yes, something like that. Seems you and I understood that you were not
a replacement mom and neither of us wanted that, but well..."
"Michael, never fear that we will move
away from this place; from the family or the falls. I feel very much a part
of all that. It's just..."
"It's just that everywhere you look
and live, you see things Mom selected, arranged the way she wanted. As I
said, the place looks like a memorial to Mom. So what have you decided?"
"Well, we have decided to decide nothing
without you..." David said.
"I have only two or three concerns--and
they are not major since I will only be here two more years. Of course you're
going to get a new bed for starters. That's damn fundamental and I get the
king-sized you have now. You can keep the trimming, but I get the bed. And
my room is my territory so no-one comes in and decorates it with fat-assed
cupids or cowboy scenes. And the third one is that something be done with
the downstairs bedroom. I am as guilty as you, Dad, but frankly, it's become
a junk room and we don't need that."
David and I both were laughing so hard
we were crying. When we finally caught our breath, David said, "First, the
bed is yours. I agree, it's a pretty vital piece of furniture and we'll get
a new one tomorrow."
"And your room is your territory, Michael.
Even if you were going to be here twenty years, it's still yours. While I
had thought of painting one wall dayglo pink and papering the other three
with blue cabbage roses, I guess I can forego that," I laughed. "And the
downstairs bedroom has already been decided upon. I'm going to decorate it
in blue or pink, I guess."
"I knew it! I flatass knew it!" Michael
said, ran across the room and grabbed and hugged me. "And if you've got to
be traditional, although I hate it, you'll have to go with pink. I am going
to have a baby sister! And I am sooooo very glad she was conceived at the
falls and in broad daylight like the rest of us!"
"Whoa, wait a minute," David said.
"What are you talking about?"
"Look, Dad, Margaret's pregnant with
a girl who was conceived at the falls in broad daylight. All of the Gang
of Four know we were conceived there in broad daylight."
"Well, if you know where and when the
other three were conceived, you know more than I do," David said.
"Just check it out with Greywolf and
Jens. You'll find out I'm right."
"And the only time Margaret and I ..."
David was blushing big time and I was
laughing like crazy at his son putting him on the spot. "Dad, don't try to
fool the expert, you and Margaret had sex BEFORE you were married and she's
pregnant with my sister from that. And don't think I am going to forget that
in case I need it later--I mean sex before marriage, not getting Mary Kathryn
pregnant. Besides, our first will be a boy."
"Ok, Son, when and where are moot points
now. But don't get hung up on having a sister."
"Yes, Michael, I'm glad you are pleased
and excited. I wasn't sure how you would take it. But don't get hung up on
a sister to the point you will be disappointed if it's a brother," I said.
"Don't you know?" Michael asked incredulously.
"No, I don't know and won't for a while--even
if I decide I want to know."
"Well, I know. It's a girl. So decorate
for a girl and be thinking about a name for a girl. There must be several
hundred floating around the family since only Jens and Gabrielle managed
to have a girl. Now if I may sum up this conversation so you two can get
me some supper: 1. This house is going to be turned inside out and made into
a home for this family--David, Margaret, Michael and the girl--or girls.
Actually, I may as well tell you now, you're carrying twins, Margaret. In
being turned inside out, the downstairs bedroom will become a nursery and
I will get the king-sized bed and decorate my own room. 2. Margaret got pregnant
at the falls in broad daylight BEFORE you two were married. 3. She is having
sisters for me. 4. You two are going to get busy with supper because I'm
starved. That sums that up. Now the next item of business, about which I
have little say, is the money situation. You two need to deal with the "yours
and mine" money situation because it will cause very serious problems down
the road--not too far down the road, I might add. Is that about right?"
"On the nose, Michael, on the nose,"
I said, "except maybe the sister or sisters part."
"What you want to bet I'm right, Margaret?
A new car, a night of utter wild passionate love for me and wild woman, name
what you are willing to risk."
"The right to choose your sister's
name against washing supper dishes until your brother is potty trained,"
I laughed.
"You're on!" Michael said and extended
his hand. After we shook hands, he went back upstairs saying, "Now get busy
with supper."
I was laughing so hard I couldn't stop
and David was just looking very puzzled. "I don't know where he was conceived
or if it was daylight or dark, but you sure got a winner in that one," I
said when I could finally stop laughing.
"Well, he's right. He was conceived
at the falls in the daylight, but what has me puzzled is how he knows. I
certainly never told him and I know Elizabeth didn't. She was so old fashioned
about sex, if she had her way he would still be thinking you went to the
hospital and picked out a baby. More than that, I've never heard Jens or
Greywolf talk about when or where the other three were conceived. Very strange.
I'll check on that. And he is so positive you are carrying a girl."
"Just wishful thinking on his part.
And I'll tell you another thing: I can't understand why his father thought
a woman wouldn't find great joy in being stepmother to that kid or wife of
his father."
David and I got busy and supper was
soon ready and David called Michael. When he came down he asked, "What do
you think of Isabell Buffy?" and laughed.
David
Saturday morning Jens, Greywolf and
I were going to help my brother get some things in place for the big Sweet
Sixteen party for Michael and Mary Kathryn. When the three of us were in
the van, I asked, "Guys, I have a very, very personal question to ask. If
you know and won't mind telling, where were your kids conceived and what
time of day?"
"Strange question, David," Greywolf
said, "But I assume you have a good reason for asking. I can tell you exactly
when and the time of day Matt was conceived although Yong Jin and I have
never discussed it or told anyone. I mean, it's not a dinner conversation
topic," Greywolf laughed. "It was before Yong Jin left to do what was supposed
to be a four-week state evaluation of a school system on the coast. The team
decided to work weekends so they could finish in three weeks. The day
before she was to leave, we were both pretty down. It was a perfect Indian
summer day, so we decided to go to the falls after lunch. We sat and talked
and made love--I must say, several times. When she got back from the trip,
she had started having morning sickness and knew she was pregnant. So Matt
was conceived at the falls sometime between mid-afternoon and just before
sunset. I remember after we had made love the last time, we walked to Lookout
Rock and watched the sunset. If I had a calendar, I could even give you the
date."
"Not necessary, but you're sure you
never told anyone until now?"
"Positive, and you know Yong Jin would
never discuss such--probably not even with me!" Greywolf laughed.
"Well, I can be as positive about my
two. Luke was conceived in October as well, and damn, it was the same day
as Matt! Greywolf, I guess we almost bumped into each other," Jens
laughed. "Gabrielle had just received the news her father had died and she
was going back to Germany for the burial and to help her mother get things
in order. As with you and Yong Jin, Greywolf, we knew we would be separated
for a month or so. When I got home, Gabrielle was packed and was really feeling
down. When I walked in, she said, "Jens, before I go tomorrow, I'd like to
spend the night under the stars at the falls. Well, we did and, strangely
enough, did not have sex that night. We talked and cuddled until dawn then
went to Lookout Rock to watch the sunrise. We sat in silence for over an
hour, watching the sunrise, then just sitting and holding each other.
Finally, we made love on Lookout Rock, twice as I remember--and I do!--then
we went down to the beach, ate and made love a couple more times and left
just before noon. Luke was conceived at the falls in the morning and I know
it was the same day as Matt because Gabrielle was worried about what Greywolf
and I would do with our wives gone. When she came back from Germany, she
was sure she was pregnant and she was right."
"Mary Kathryn was a very different
matter. I know we all did everything we could to have children after Matt
and Luke were born--both Gabrielle and I were seeing a doctor, hoping she
would get pregnant. She kept one of those fertility charts and the doctor
told me to avoid sex until the best time for her and then have at it--as
many times as I could on the right day, then hold off to see if Gabrielle
was pregnant. When the day arrived, I took the day off and Gabrielle suggested
we go to the falls, 'It helped once,' she had said. As soon as we could get
Luke settled with Elizabeth, we went to the falls and had sex as many times
as I could! We finally came back around five and, sure enough, Gabrielle
was pregnant."
"Who all knows that, Jens?"
"Gabrielle and I. Why?"
"Well, I asked Margaret if it was ok
to talk with you and she said it was, but keep this under your hat until
tonight. Michael was ready to make an announcement to the world and
Margaret told him he could make the announcement at his party. Margaret
is pregnant..."
"Got a little ahead of the game, David?"
Jens laughed and I blushed.
"Well, kinda. And Michael assures me
he'll not forget it in case he needs it."
"He better not need it anytime soon,"
Jens said, only half joking. "But why the question about the kids?"
"When we told Michael last night, he
assured us he knew already, that the baby--or babies--he says Margaret is
pregnant with twin girls, and where he got the idea, I don't know. He said
he was pleased that she or shes were conceived in broad daylight at the falls
like the rest of the kids. I knew neither Elizabeth nor I had told him about
his own conception and I sure didn't think either of you have told him about
the other three, but he was adamant and said they all knew it. Damnedest
thing. Now I wonder about the girl twins!
"Sure strange and I will definitely
check it out with mine," Jens said.
"Same here," Greywolf said. By the
time the strange conversation was over, we had arrived at Michael's place.
Matt
Luke had been at loose ends when his
exhibition was completed and now I was at loose ends because he spent Saturday
with Uncle Michael supervising the packing of his work. It was to be moved
to St. Mary's Sunday afternoon and he and Uncle Michael would start setting
it up Monday after school. We had talked about his not sneaking a listen
during practice and I promised I wouldn't try to see the exhibit.
He finally came by about 6:00 and said
he was going home for a nap before he got dressed for the party. "Man, getting
everything packed was a job and I was a nervous wreck half the time because,
although I knew the guys packing knew what they were doing, it was like watching
someone pack your children. I am as exhausted as if I had been running all
day," he laughed.
"Are you coming here to get ready?"
I asked, hopefully.
"I'm not sure. Do you think I'd be
welcomed?" he laughed. That did it! I tackled him and laid one on him he's
not likely to forget. "I guess that answers my question," he said, returning
my last kiss. "I'll be here by seven. If I get a nap, I'll be fine for the
party, otherwise I'd probably fall asleep the minute we sat down. Guess we
won't have time to play around. We'll just have to get dressed when I get
here."
"Better than nothing," I replied and,
after another deep kiss, he left. Since I had been helping Dad around the
farm, I decided I was pretty tired myself and went upstairs, undressed and
slipped into bed.
For the first time in a while, I felt
Luke's approaching presence before waking up. As he slid his wonderful body
next to mine, I awoke, turned and saw his face before mine, his eyes sparkling,
a huge smile on his face. He leaned down and his lips touched mine, his tongue
found my open mouth and brought the taste I loved so much, the taste of Luke.
His arms encircled my body, pulling me to himself. The touch of his hands
against my bare skin send a thrill through my body as his fingers set my
hair free. Luke's hair was now long enough for me bury my fingers in it to
bring his lips, once again, to mine. "Do you want to be my party animal or
my sex kitten?" Luke asked as he looked longingly into my eyes.
"No question about that! But I don't
think we have a real choice do we? I guess we better hit the shower--and
little playing around because we'll be late." Of course, there was some playing
around, but not as much as either of us would have liked. Choosing what to
wear was no problem. Uncle Michael had said this was a dress--coat and tie--occasion.
Luke and I dressed in identical navy blazers and grey slacks with red and
blue striped ties. I had to admit, we were dreamboats!
When we arrived, most of the Fellowship
of the Rings were already present; only Bill and Linda were missing. When
they came in, Gabrielle said, "Bill, next time you decide to wear lipstick,
use a mirror. It goes on your lips, not all over your face!" I guess Bill
had been around me too much because he had contracted the blushing disease!
When we had all arrived, Uncle Michael
brought out champagne and said, "I think Sweet Sixteen calls for special
toasts" as he opened the bottles and handed them to Jens and David who poured.
"Michael, Mary Kathryn, here's to your passing a milestone. May there be
many others and may they all be happy ones. Here's to your health and happiness!"
Uncle Michael said as he raised his glass, and we all followed suit.
"Mary Kathryn, may you continue to
grow and may you bring to many others as much happiness as you have given
your mother and me in your short sixteen years," Jens gave the second toast.
"Michael, may you know as much happiness
as you have given me in your sixteen years," David toasted his son.
There were other toasts and Luke said,
"I would toast Michael for his teaching me that love is fun!"
After Luke, each of the Fellowship
toasted Michael and Mary Kathryn for some aspect of their character and personality.
Finally, Michael raised his glass and said, "Here's to the family which has
stood beside me and guided me in the right way and especially to Mary Kathryn
who has given me love I would never have dreamed possible."
Mary Kathryn was the last to raise
her glass and toasted Michael and the family, "Here's to the blessing that
I have been given by being surrounded by a loving family--my mom and dad,
Yong Jin and Greywolf, David and Elizabeth and now Margaret and three wonderful
brothers and a lover!"
Just as we headed to dinner, Uncle
Michael filled our glasses again and, when he did, Michael raised his glass
and said, "A final toast. Here's to Eugene who has the courage of a lion
and the willingness to risk all on behalf of others!" As glasses were
raised, all present cheered.
As soon as the blessing had been said
and the food served, Eugene spoke up. "You all know Larry and I spent most
of the day at the courthouse looking at tapes McBride had made of me. Knowing
your love and care for us, I know you'd like to know what happened. I had
feared reliving those horrible events and what Larry might think about me
after seeing them. Larry spent last night with me and I was essentially zoned
out. The TV was on and there was a biography of Marilyn Monroe on. We were
half watching it at first, but gradually we both got involved in the tragic
history of that beautiful woman. On the day she married Joe Dimaggio, a reporter
asked her what about her life she would change. She replied, after a moment's
thought, 'Nothing, because if anything were changed, I wouldn't be here and
know the happiness I know today.' Today, when the tapes started, I remembered
that. I was not the person I was watching. I had been then, but this is now.
And I realized had those events not happened, the love I know from you all
would not be. I would not have Millie as my mom nor Larry as my lover. Far
from being distressed tonight, I am here celebrating the birthdays of two
wonderful friends and of my present life."
Dinner became more festive after Eugene's
revelation. After dinner, before the adults retired to the carriage house
for drinks and coffee, Uncle Michael brought in a large tray loaded with
packages. Most were obviously from Mr. Swartz's shop. "Are you kids
keeping Mr. Swartz in business?" Dad laughed.
"If it's necessary, I guess we would,"
Bill laughed. Larry and Eugene, Bill and Linda, Paula and Jacob, Luke and
I had all bought "couples' gifts" for Mary Kathryn, all from Mr. Swartz's
shop--necklaces, bracelets, pendants and a brooch--all featuring Michael's
roadrunner or kokopeli. Bill and Linda, Paula and Jacob had given Michael
several CDs he had mentioned from time to time at lunch. Larry and Eugene
had given him a silver chain from Mr. Swartz's and Luke and I had debated
for a while, but finally settled on a Hopi overlay belt buckle with the roadrunner
on it. The adults in the family had given each of the two more practical
gifts, clothes and such as they always did. Uncle Michael said, "Michael,
I wanted to get something I knew my long-unknown nephew would enjoy. I hope
you will--and Mary Kathryn with you." He handed Michael a very small box,
plainly wrapped. When Michael opened it, there was a key inside. "I expect
you to follow Larry's mom's rule--be responsible and show respect," Uncle
Michael said as Michael remained speechless. The key was to a new Geo Tracker.
"Jens, from what Luke has said, this car has built-in birth control--a stick
shift and a four-wheel drive lever," Uncle Michael laughed.
It was now time for Michael and Mary
Kathryn to open their gifts to each other. Mary Kathryn was ecstatic when
she saw the earrings with the roadrunner on them. When Michael opened his,
it was a medallion with a beautifully engraved St. Michael on the front,
slaying a dragon. On the back were the words, "To Michael from one who loves
him for his fearless dragon slaying. MKL." With the gifts opened, the adults
were ready to leave when Michael said "Hold up! There's one more gift. Won't
be opened for about eight months or so, and it has some pretty beautiful
wrapping. Margaret is giving me twin sisters!" A flood of questions and comments
followed. Margaret finally made it clear the twin sisters were Michael's
idea and that she wasn't sure whether she was carrying a boy or girl.
"Were they conceived at the falls in
daylight like the rest of us?" Mary Kathryn asked.
"You know they were," I replied and
Luke and Michael were both nodding. The adults looked puzzled. I don't know
why. We all knew we were conceived at the falls in daylight.
The adults left us to ourselves and
we ate, drank, and danced until long past midnight--long past. But before
we started, we all had to go outside and see Michael's car. It was the brightest
lime green I had ever seen. It practically glowed in the dark!
"So much for parking in a lovers' lane,"
Bill laughed. "Everyone will raise hell because you will light up their activities."
When the evening finally ended--actually
the evening ended in the morning--I knew we'd be a sleepy bunch since we
all had things to do Sunday, but it was worth it to spend time with such
great friends and family. Luke and I were so exhausted that when we reached
his place, we just undressed, tumbled into bed, kissed each other goodnight
and were asleep in seconds.
Part Thirty-five A: The Exhibition
Matt
Gabrielle was wise in the ways of teenagers
and, knowing that we had been out as late as we were the night before, let
me and Luke sleep as late as possible. We barely had time to grab a quick
shower--and Luke had to shave, of course--grab a glass of OJ and head for
St. Mary's. As soon as we were in the Jeep, Luke risked the family jewels
to give me a full, open-mouth kiss and said, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, I can see
right now this is going to be a week with very little love making. Today,
Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday we will be slaving away on the concert and
exhibition. And you know Greywolf--at least--will insist we get a good night's
sleep Tuesday because of the AP physics exam Wednesday. Thursday--are you
having practice Thursday?"
"I had thought we might not, but Paula
and Eugene overruled me, so we will."
"So Thursday after school we'll be
right back in the grind. Wednesday we can leave right after the exam and
maybe have a little time together, but there is so damn much riding on this
week and weekend. I mean if we don't pull this off and get into Oberlin,
I guess we'll be separated for at least the school year..." We both became
very silent for what seemed like ages. "Matt, we have to do this and if that
means giving up any love making this week, we have to go without. Otherwise..."
Again, silence. "Anyway Thursday and maybe Friday afternoon after school,
I'll be with Uncle Michael training the docents and..."
"Maybe Saturday morning we can find
some play time because Saturday afternoon we're at Millie's and Saturday
night and Sunday..."
"Well, for me at least, there's something
else. Fr. Tom is doing a crash confirmation course from 7:30 until 9:30 every
night this week. That's also more important to me than I thought it would
be. I mean, it's really important to me..." More silence. "Maybe we can wave
to each other as we pass in the hall at school," Luke smiled and again managed
to get in a kiss without spearing himself on a gear shift or my driving off
the road.
"Yonghon Tongmu, when I realized you
loved me as I loved you, I thought life would be one long, romantic journey
together. But..."
"Yea, Sarang Hanun Pomul, so did I.
I mean, I thought being in love smoothed the road of life into a super highway.
Sure as hell wrong on that weren't we?"
"But would you trad..."
"Never! Whatever it costs, it's worth
it, my beautiful Dark Angel," Luke said as we pulled into the parking lot
at St. Mary's.
Throwing all caution to the winds,
I leaned across the console and pulled his mouth to mine for a long, deep,
tasting-my-Luke kiss. "Nor would I." We both jumped out of the Jeep, me heading
for the choir room and Luke for the Common Hall. Uncle Michael's Lexus was
already parked in the parking lot, but I didn't see Mr. Stephenson's car.
While I was having the choir warm up,
Luke met with Uncle Michael, Mr. Stephenson and the other members of the
Fellowship to talk about the afternoon. Seems Mr. Stephenson had come with
Uncle Michael.
Gabrielle, Margaret, Millie and Mom
were preparing a picnic lunch for all of us to have at St. Mary's because
we were all going to help get the exhibition set up.
When Fr. Tom made the morning announcements,
he said that the Common Hall and some adjoining classrooms would be off limits
until the exhibition opened Saturday night. "Coffee hour will be on the church
lawn today. And if you haven't been invited to the Saturday night concert/recital
for family and friends or didn't call in for tickets for Sunday shortly after
it was announced, I'm afraid you are out of luck," he said, "but the exhibition
will be open Sunday evening until everyone has seen what they want to see
and all of you are welcome to come. Also, as I announced in the newsletter,
the bishop will be here for confirmation next Sunday. Because the Common
Hall will be in use, there will be a simple reception for him and the confirmands
in the downstairs hall, but no parish dinner," he added.
After coffee hour, the family and the
Fellowship spread a picnic in the church yard and had lunch. When we finished,
we went into the Common Room. "John, Luke and I will work with teams today
getting the display panels set up," Uncle Michael said. "Then we will start
mounting the lights. I don't expect we will get much done beyond the panels
today, if that. We will meet here after school each day and those not involved
with the concert will mount the exhibition. We need to have it mounted by
Wednesday so we can begin training docents. Michael and Mary Kathryn, you
need to decide whether or not you want to be docents. Luke wanted to keep
his two special projects a secret until the opening, but decided he would
like for you to be docents which means you will have to see them and keep
them secret."
"I really would like to be surprised,
but I also want to be a part of my brother's big moment," Mary Kathryn said.
"Same here," Michael said.
"Uncle Michael, what if I kept the
two pieces veiled until Saturday morning and have a private opening for the
family? Then you could fill in Michael and Mary Kathryn on anything they
need to know."
As heads nodded in agreement, I looked
at him and mouthed, "There goes Saturday morning."
"Sounds good to me," Uncle Michael
said. "Well, let's get organized and go to work."
Uncle Michael had drawn a chart of
the placement of the panels and we all started setting them up. I expected
the task to move much faster than it did, but it was 6:00 before we had them
in place and secured. There was still the task of mounting the special lighting
equipment and getting it adjusted when Uncle Michael called a halt. "I have
arranged to have food and drinks delivered to my place so let's call it quits
and go eat and relax. We got more done than I expected so we are in fine
shape."
As soon as we could, Luke and I left
school Monday. I was going to help him and Uncle Michael mount lights until
time for practice.
When practice was over, most of the
lights had been mounted, but not adjusted. Uncle Michael ordered in fast
food for the crew then Paula, Eugene and I joined in setting up lights until
time for confirmation class. Since Paula, Jacob and I were not involved in
that, I offered to drive them home. Linda attended class with Bill. "I need
to keep an eye on this wayward Baptist," she laughed as she kissed him on
the cheek. Hardly enough for such a stud muffin, so he pulled her to himself
for a real kiss.
"Ah, young love," Paula said and laughed.
Bill actually blushed, then became
very serious. "Yea, young love. Matt, Luke, I want you two to know just how
very happy you have made me. I am discovering young love; I mean real love
and, man, it is fantastic. It's hard for me to believe about myself but,
just think, only a few weeks ago all I saw or wanted--I thought--from a woman
was a good fuck. You know, screw 'em and move on to the next one. Then all
I would have wanted Linda for was as a willing fuck partner. I would get
my rocks off without ever thinking about her. In fact, I have had women whose
name I couldn't remember the next day. I cared nothing for them from the
waist up--well, maybe I'd have to include teats...."
True to form, Linda landed one upside
Bill's head--but pulled the punch and laughed.
"Anyway, now... now... I mean... this
love and courting thing is new to me and I'm a real greenhorn at it. But,
man, the learning is sure as hell great even if it is hard work!"
While I took Jacob and Paula home,
Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson continued adjusting the lights. When I returned,
all were adjusted. "That's it for right now," Uncle Michael said. "Final
adjustments will be made when the works are mounted. But it's time for the
class to be over and I think we all need to go home. Ready John?"
Mr. Stephenson smiled and said, "Ready
Michael."
"I'll get the lights," I said as Uncle
Michael and Mr. Stephenson turned to go. When they stepped outside, I saw
Mr. Stephenson reach out and take Uncle Michael's hand before the door closed.
I smiled to myself. I guess there really was something in the water at the
farm.
Michael and Mary Kathryn were going
to ride home with me and Luke since, as a sophomore, he was not allowed to
have his car at school. As we approached the Jeep, Luke said, "Wild Woman,
I'm sure you and Michael are expecting to make out in the back seat, but
I have a better plan. Michael needs to practice his driving more than he
needs to make out. Toss him the keys, Matt." When I did, Luke took me by
the hand and we crawled into the back seat.
"I hope you two don't expect this to
happen every night this week!" Mary Kathryn pouted. "Time about is fair play!"
And so it was. Tuesday night, Mary
Kathryn and Michael got the back seat. About half way home, Luke said, "You
two are going to have to slow it down back there, you're fogging the windshield!"
"We are not!" Mary Kathryn responded.
"It's your unrequited lust doing the fogging."
Luke laughed, "You're probably right!"
Greywolf was waiting for Luke and me
when we got home for a physics review session. He had us stop at 10:30 saying
he thought we were both in good shape for the AP exam. "Now go to bed and
keep the playing around low key!" he laughed. We were both pretty tired from
the past few days and, while we hadn't admitted it to each other, we were
pretty tense about the coming weekend.
After some snuggling and cuddling,
I lay with my head on Luke's chest, thinking about my love for this man when
he said, "Matt, can I ask you a question?"
"Of course, why do you ask?"
"Well, sometimes I feel like if you
don't talk about something it's not there."
This sounded serious. "Ask away."
"Are you nervous about your recital
and the concert?"
I was relieved even though I didn't
know what I had feared. "To be honest?"
"Yea, to be honest."
"Frankly, I'm scared stiff. You know
what this weekend means for us."
"Yea, that's why I am scared shitless.
If we blow this, it's Florida and New York. Sarang Hanun Pomul, I don't know
how I can stand being away from you for nine months."
"Sometimes that's all I can think about,
Yonghon Tongmu. Today at practice, one of the pieces was almost perfect,
but not quite and suddenly I felt paralyzed. I felt it had to be perfect
or we would be separated. I know it didn't have to be absolutely perfect,
but I couldn't convince myself of that. I guess for the past few days, I
have come to realize how much is really riding on this weekend."
"It's got to work, Matt, but if we
allow ourselves to keep getting worked up, it won't be worth shit."
"I know, and we also need to do well
on the AP exam, but I don't feel as though I can go to sleep. To be honest,
Bright Angel, I am tense as hell!"
"I've heard sex is a great tension
reliever..."
"Luke, right now I don't think I could
get worked up for sex and you know if I can't, things are really tense. It
would just remind me of what's at stake!"
"Get your running clothes on, Matthew,
we are going running."
"Luke, it's night!'
"But the moon is bright. Let's run
off the tension!" He jumped out of bed, grabbed his running shorts and I
did the same. We climbed down the trellis and hit the road. As we approached
Michael's place, I noticed his lights were on. "Want to see if Michael would
like to join us? Maybe he can take our mind off what's happening."
"Let's." We opened the front door quietly
and went up the stairs. I tapped on Michael's door very softly and he opened
it.
"Hi, guys. I was just about to go to
bed. Whats'up?"
"Michael, we are both so uptight over
the weekend and we have AP physics tomorrow and couldn't even think about
going to sleep."
"Have you thought about keeping your
hands off each other? That might help," he laughed.
"To tell the truth, we haven't done
anything except some cuddling. Not even a lot of kisses. We have so damn
much riding on this weekend..."
"Yea, I thought about that a few times
myself. When I kissed Wild Woman good night, I thought about what it would
be like to be separated for almost a year." Michael was very serious. There
was no joking now. "So what have you decided to do?"
"I thought a good run was in order.
Maybe if we get really tired, we can sleep. Matt asked about your joining
us."
"Sure, why not. Let me get shorts on."
Honest, we were so used to seeing each other that way, it hadn't occurred
to me Michael was naked. He quickly pulled on a pair of shorts and we went
outside.
Passing through the house, I asked,
"What's going on, Michael? I hadn't noticed when we went in, the place is
wreck."
"Well, it's kinda a long story, but
basically, Dad was finally woken up to the fact that he had treated Margaret
as a plug in wife and the whole place is being done over. And of course,
the downstairs bedroom is being made into a nursery. What do you guys think
of Kathryn Elizabeth and Mary Margaret as names for the girls? Gets all my
major women in my sisters' names."
"You're sure about this twin business,
aren't you?"
"Positive."
"The names sound fine to me."
"I like them," Luke said, "Now let's
run."
After we had been running for quite
awhile, Michael asked, "Isn't that the Richardson's farmhouse?"
"Sure is," Luke answered. "Hell, we've
run five miles already! I guess we need to turn back."
We did and after a couple miles, Michael
said, "Guys, let's drop back to a slow jog. I want to talk." We slowed down
and while we were all three breathing hard, soon we had caught our breath
enough for Michael to talk. "You know I had that strange dream, Matt. Well,
I had another one. It was almost like the other one; I mean, Mary Kathryn
was holding a baby, our boy, but this time I was there. Well, actually, I
was standing looking at the two of them. Well, that's not it either. I was
kinda in half--two halves, I mean. Well, I mean, I was in one piece, but
each half was dressed differently. Both were in black, black robes, but they
were different. When I spoke to Mary Kathryn, she looked up and said, 'Michael,
are you ever going to make up your mind or are you always going to be two
halves of a person? Our son needs a whole daddy, not two pieces of one."
I started to answer, but then I woke up. I was absolutely soaking in sweat
and felt that I was cut in half, but I didn't know why. I didn't understand.
Can you make sense of that?"
"I can't," Luke said. "I mean sounds
as if you have a split personality," he smiled, "but I have always seen just
Michael who is about as together as anyone I know."
I didn't say anything for the longest
time. I seemed to be seeing an image in my mind, kinda flashing on and off.
I could almost get it, then it would flash off. "I don't know, Michael. I
kinda have a mental picture I can't get clear, but I think Luke is on to
something. Maybe not a split personality, but a split into who you will be
or could be. I mean you keep seeing Mary Kathryn with your son and that's
not likely to be anytime soon--at least I hope it's not."
Michael smiled a weak smile and said,
"If there is a son of mind, there will be a star in the east and I'll be
a cross eyed dove."
Luke looked puzzled. "A cross eyed
dove?"
"Yea," Michael laughed. "Haven't you
noticed the Holy Spirit descending on the Virgin in the stained glass window
at St. Mary's? It's cross eyed!"
I had seen the window since I was a
baby and had never noticed, but as soon as Michael said that, I remembered
the dove and, damn, it was cross eyed! "So your dream is about the future,
Michael. And don't put it down as a 'mere dream.' I learned long ago there
are dreams and there are dreams. I think you are almost in touch with something
and your dreams are guiding you. Think about the future and being two halves
rather than a whole. I bet something will come out."
"I talked with Fr. Tom about the first
dream the day I went in with you and he said almost the same thing except
he added, 'Talk with your brothers. I think they are in touch with something
I know nothing about.' I talked to Matt, but didn't go further. I was afraid
you'd laugh--and I don't know why. I knew better. When I told Mary Kathryn,
she laughed at first and said, 'I hope this baby boy bit doesn't mean you're
just trying to get in my pants.' But then she said, 'Michael, it can't be
bad because I am holding our son.' Well, we're at my place. Thanks guys and
this is among us. Ok?"
"Ok, Lil Bro," I said and Luke nodded
agreement.
At home, we climbed the trellis, took
a quick shower and fell into bed. After a soft good night kiss, we were both
sound asleep in seconds.
Both Luke and I were confident when
we met the gang for lunch as were Eugene and Larry. "Fives all the way 'round?"
Jacob asked.
"I think so," Larry replied. The other
three of us nodded agreement.
"Looks like Independence may have another
distinction," Michael said. "How many AP Scholars are we going to have this
year?"
"I don't know," Larry said. "Eugene
and I haven't taken as many AP classes as Luke and Matt, but I think we'll
make AP Scholar with Honor. Luke, how about you and Matt?"
"If we did as well on ours this year
as we think, we'll be AP Scholars with Distinction."
"Man, we have something to live up
to," Michael said.
As soon as lunch was over, I asked
Luke, "How about we take an hour or so before we go to St. Mary's. It's a
beautiful day and I hear the falls calling."
"Sounds good to me, Matt, Babe. Want
to ask Eugene and Larry to join us? I think Eugene could use some falls time.
I mean he's under more pressure than we are and holding up well, but time
at the falls would..."
"Sorry I didn't think of that, Luke.
Kinda selfish. I was just thinking of us, I mean, 'Babe, I need your loving!'"
I sang. But those two guys... Man, they have a shit load of stuff. Hey, Eugene,
Larry, wait up," I called to the two who had started out of the cafeteria.
When we caught up with them Luke said,
"Look, guys, Matt and I are going to the falls for an hour or so before we
get back to work at St. Mary's. How'd you guys like to join us?"
"Sure we wouldn't be invading your
time together? I know how precious it is this week," Larry said as he put
his arm around Eugene's waist and hugged him.
"Same for you two. Let's go. Do us
all good." As the two walked toward Eugene's car, Luke said, "Matt, some
way or other, those guys need to know we are all supporting them. I mean
what Eugene is facing is terrible and they have as much riding on this concert
as we do."
"Yea, you're right."
By the time we were at the end of the
path to the falls, all four of us were naked and ran to the top of the falls
and dived in. We were immediately transformed form care-ridden adults into
normal, care-free teens--swimming, ducking each other and generally horsing
around. We swam for over an hour, then flopped down on the blankets we had
brought from the Jeep. I guess, given the fact that our love making had been
put on the back burner for awhile, you would have expected some heavy making
out, but it didn't happen. I lay with my head of Luke's chest, listening
to his heartbeat, as he stroked my hair, occasionally kissing me on the top
of the head. Eugene and Larry were doing about the same thing--occasional
kisses, stroking each others hair, rubbing hands over the naked body of the
one they loved. It was a gentle, loving time. The sun was so warm and the
swim and being with my Luke was so comforting, I fell asleep. It seems all
four of us did. Luke woke me up when he pulled me atop himself and gave me
the hottest, open mouth, lots of tongue kiss I had had for what seemed years.
I could feel myself getting hard fast when Larry called over to us from where
he and Eugene were lying, "I can see things are heating up over there and
I hate to break it up, but I think we better head for St. Mary's. A quick
glance at my watch told me he was right.
Practice was near perfect. The PBS
engineers asked us to do one of the pieces again so they could test the taping
equipment since it was all installed by the time we had finished practice.
We did the "Hallelujah" from "Christ on the Mount of Olives." That should
have been a good test of any taping equipment!
After we finished, Larry, Eugene, Paul
and I started toward the Common Hall. As soon as we were alone, Larry pulled
Eugene to himself, gave him a great kiss, and said, "Gene, it sounds wonderful.
It is going to be great!" When we reached the Common Hall, I was surprised
at how much work had been done and how great it looked. Millie had been right
when she said this would be the cultural event of the century for Concord.
Luke
I had gone directly to the Common Hall
where Uncle Michael, Mr. Stephenson and the gang were already at work. Everyone
was laughing and having a good time and obviously enjoying what they were
doing. "Greetings, Art Lovers," I announced as I entered the Common Hall.
"Luke, I left the mounting of the work
in Gallery Three for you. Here's the key. The door is locked" Uncle Michael
said.
I went into the gallery and stood for
a long time just staring at the painting of my Lakota warrior. I was absolutely
weak-kneed just looking at it. It was the very essence of the man I loved
with my whole being. Finally I tore myself away and mounted the picture.
When it was in place, I got Mr. Stephenson and Uncle Michael to come and
help adjust the lights. When they walked in, both stood still as I had done
and looked at the picture. "Luke, that is a magnificent work. It makes me
feel honored to be able to say it was done by one of my students. It really
captures Matt's spirit and, if I may say so, I can see why you love him so.
You are a lucky man to be loved by him. And don't get me wrong, he is damn
lucky to be loved by you. And both of you are lucky--no, I would use a different
word--you are blessed in that you love each other. I hope and pray that never
changes. Sometimes, we get lucky, really lucky, truly lucky when we least
expect it," he smiled as he glanced at Uncle Michael.
"Look, I may be not quite eighteen
and I'm really new to this love stuff, but I'm not blind or dumb. When are
you going to announce your new partner to the family, Uncle Michael?"
Mr.Stephenson blushed as Matt at his
best and Uncle Michael laughed. "I think that has just about been figured
out by all of you, hasn't it? I know Michael is on to us and David would
be if he weren't so wrapped up in making things right for Margaret and himself.
You know you and Matt started the whole thing the night we went to Lexington.
John and I talked after we got to his place-- we love the same things so
talk came easy--and I guess you could say we've been dating, courting, whatever,
ever since. We have the same kinds of values: we both have lost partners.
It just came naturally to me--falling in love again, I mean. I worried about
the age difference, but John didn't. He worried about the money difference,
but I didn't. The only problem we had was when I suggested we move into the
carriage house and he balked."
"I didn't want Michael to romanticize
our relationship into his with James. I knew and loved James. He was a wonderful
person, but I am not James."
"How long until the house is finished?"
"Too long, but the private space, our
space, will be done by the first of June. In the meantime, John and I have
talked about the carriage house and made it--not the one I remember, but
one I WILL remember. That's the reason you haven't seen me around your place
very much. I've been camping out there making sure it's what John and I want
and not something I remember with fondness.
"Did you, by any chance, speak to David
about a similar situation?"
Uncle Michael laughed, "As a matter
of fact, I did, but it was beginning to dawn on my baby brother. It's just
that he can be slow sometimes."
"When are you moving in. I mean both
of you."
"We'll both be in as soon as this exhibition
is over. Not that we're not moved in already for all practical purposes,"
Mr. Stephenson said, blushing.
"What John means is we have our bed
already," Uncle Michael laughed and Mr. Stephenson put Matt's blushing to
shame.
"Great! Another of my favorite people
becomes part of the family." I hugged both of them and said, "You two are
damn lucky too!"
Both said, "Agreed," in the same breath.
When the lights were adjusted, my two
mentors left the gallery and closed the door softly behind them, leaving
me with the painting. I continued to look at it and think about the past
two or three months and how much had happened and, indeed, how blessed I
was. My love for Matt and his for me overwhelmed me. Before I knew it, tears
of sheer joy were streaming down my cheeks. I wiped them away, turned and
walked to the door. I looked back at the painting once more before closing
and locking the door.
As I entered the Common Hall, Eugene
and Larry walked in, arm in arm. They were followed shortly by Matt and Paula.
"How'd it go?" I asked.
"Couldn't have been better," Paula
responded. Eugene and Matt agreed.
"Larry, how's your part shaping up?"
"Great! There are some tiny adjustments
to be made, but the test tape we did today sounded very good. Tomorrow we'll
make any adjustments to the mikes--I don't think there will be any to be
honest--and start operating the cameras. We'll tape the whole practice if
the mikes don't take a lot of time and I'll get my hands on the remote control
for some cameras. Man, I am really getting into this audio-video thing!"
When it came time for the confirmation
class, I walked outside with Matt, Paula and Jacob. Matt was taking them
home since they stayed after practice and worked on the exhibition. As we
stepped outside, Matt said, "Luke, isn't that your van leaving the parking
lot?"
By the time he said it, the van was
turning the corner. "I'm not sure. It looks like it. But why would it be
here? I guess it just looks like ours."
"Must be," he responded. In spite of
the fact we were standing in the open, Matt suddenly kissed me and said,
"Be back for you and the wild ones, Stud Muffin."
"He's not my brand, Matt," Jacob laughed,
"but if he were, I'd sure go along with the stud muffin bit. Wouldn't you,
Paula."
"Think I'd have to agree with you,
Jacob."
Wednesday essentially saw the completion
of the mounting of the exhibition. Uncle Michael and Mr.Stephenson were going
to make final adjustments of the lights for "Surrounded by So Great a Cloud"
after everyone else had left. Thursday Uncle Michael started training docents.
I was surprised that he seldom had questions of me. It was obvious he had
been listening carefully every time I had answered one of the questions the
gang asked or had made a comment. I think he knew the pieces better than
I.
Of course, most of us were involved
in confirmation class and that set a stopping point for work and training.
Confirmation class was lively with questions and since practically everyone
involved knew each other, no subject was closed. Michael raised the question
of sex before marriage and Larry the church's position on gays. Bill was
concerned about his past. There was a lot of discussion of how to live out
your faith in a world which was more concerned with things and sex and appearance
than reality. We had a great discussion on what it means to be religious.
We really got into a lively discussion when Michael talked about his conversation
with Matt about "being religious." I had thought all this religious stuff
would be boring and nothing but a bunch of rules, but soon discovered that
wasn't boring and the rules were not really rules at all. I mean I had always
been taught you do this and you go to heaven and you do that and you go to
hell and suddenly I was hearing that you had to use your own brain and principles.
It was very freeing and scary at the same time.
Wednesday and Thursday nights, Matt
slept in my bed. Neither of us were yet very comfortable making love at my
place, but we did have a great time in the shower and did some major cuddling
and great kissing. Frankly, I suspect that was about all we would have done
at his place. By the time we got home, we were exhausted by both the work
and the tension. We didn't talk about it a lot, but we were both really keyed
up over our projects. I'm sure we would have been had the outcome not been
so personally important to us, but that sure didn't make us less tense! Not
a night passed without our talking about what it would be like to be separated
for a year.
Thursday night we had talked a bit
about it when Matt said, "Luke, I don't worry about our falling out of love
or falling in love with someone else if we end up in Florida and New York.
That's not my worry. And I don't worry about missing you. I mean I know I
will and it will hurt like hell and probably have a major impact on the work
I am able to do. I know that, so I don't worry--I just hate the thought.
You know what I really worry about?"
"Well, if you don't worry about our
falling out of love with each other or about falling in love with someone
else or about the pain of being separated, I can't think of anything to worry
about. Or, to be honest, the pain of being separated is enough to be worried
about."
"Luke, what I really worry about is
being unfaithful to you. I mean we had done a damn good job--most of the
time I think too good a job--of keeping control of our passion and lust.
But you know I am horny, hot most of the time. There have been plenty of
times had you not kept a cool head, we would have been fucking like bunnies--and
I do mean fucking. I am not likely to be less horny next year than now and
there will be no love making AND I don't think we're going to leave Concord
virgins so we will have had sex, all the way sex. Man, I really do worry
about that. I don't know about you, but I know I will never stop loving you,
but I don't know what I would do if you were unfaithful to me. But I don't
worry about that, what I do worry about is me."
"I don't, Sarang Hanun Pomul. Our love
has gotten us over some pretty rough spots and I'm sure it will keep us faithful.
I know that nothing you could do would stop my loving you. That's just the
way it is. But, to be honest, I don't know how I would or could handle your
being unfaithful. But it's not going to happen," I said as I pulled Matt's
body atop mine for a deep, deep and passionate kiss. "If you're tempted,
remember this," I said as I gave him a kiss which ended only after I was
breathing for the two of us for a long while. Cuddled in each others arms,
we were soon asleep. I slept peacefully, but sometime in the night I woke
up as Matt pulled me close and gave me a special, life-giving Matt kiss.
Friday, during home room, Ms. Jones
called me, Matt, Paula and Eugene to the office. "I had a thought this weekend
and came up with a plan. If it is more than you want to do, please say so;
I will certainly understand. Each year when we have had the spring concert
by the ensemble and chorus, we have had a performance during the school day.
This year that was not planned, but what do you think about doing that Monday?
That would also allow students who might not think it important to see Luke's
work."
"I wouldn't commit the ensemble to
another performance without asking them," Eugene said. "They have worked
like slaves and I think have enjoyed it, but after Sunday they anticipated
getting on with their lives."
"Same for the chorus," Paula added.
"I would certainly be willing. Another performance is something most musicians
look forward to, but these are high school kids."
"I have only one problem with it,"
Matt said. "St. Mary's can't hold the student body and we certainly can't
do it without the organ."
"Plus the fact that the whole student
body could hardly see the exhibition at the same time," Luke added.
"Well, it seemed a good idea," Ms.
Jones said, "but I can see the problem. And I do appreciate the fact that
you two won't make a commitment for your groups without checking... I've
another thought. What do you think of this? The freshmen and sophomores will
come to school and immediately be transported to St. Mary's for the concert.
Meanwhile, the busses will come back and take the juniors and seniors to
the exhibition. We'll have the cafeteria prepare sack lunches for everyone
and after the first half, we'll have lunch on the church lawn, clean up and
then the juniors and seniors will go to the concert and the freshmen and
sophomores to the exhibition. Since they are younger, they probably will
be ready to leave before the concert is over, so the busses will bring them
back to school and go back for the juniors and seniors."
"So far as taking care of the students,
that sounds fine," Eugene said, "but now you're asking the musicians to do
two additional performances, not just one."
"It's going to be pretty hard on the
docents as well if they have to ride herd on freshmen and sophomores," I
commented.
"Some of the juniors and seniors are
no better," Paula added.
"Look, we've all worked our asses off--pardon
Ms. Jones, but we have--for this and Independence will shine because of it.
Larry told me last night the engineers have already gotten a commitment to
do two one hour broadcasts of the concert and an hour for the exhibition.
They couldn't promise, but the producer of the Performance Today was very
impressed with a tape they sent him and there is a possibility he will do
at least one program on National Public Radio. If all that is going on, I
think the students might benefit from participation in what Ms. Jones has
suggested," Eugene said. "I still won't answer for the ensemble; they will
have to do that, but I'm willing."
"You won't have to worry about behavior.
I can assure you of that. You know Independence's worse students almost always
behave like perfect ladies and gentlemen on field trips. Plus, I will make
sure the teachers understand that I expect them to see that the students
behave exceptionally well. And again, it's your decision--yours and your
groups, Paula and Eugene--but I really would like to have all our students
see what being dedicated and disciplined is about. If you like, I'll have
the two groups meet and you can discuss this with them. If we're going to
do it, members of the chorus and ensemble can report directly to St. Mary's
and Mr. Allan will take all who ride the bus as soon as they are all here."
We all agreed and Ms. Jones announced
at the beginning of the first period the two groups would meet immediately.
I went to talk with Mr. Stephenson to see what he thought.
When we got to lunch the whole cafeteria
was a buzz with students talking. I don't know why the intercom is really
necessary. I think I was the only student in the school who had not heard
the whole school was going on a field trip Monday. Mr. Stephenson had been
very pleased that my work would have more exposure, "Even if it's only high
school students," he said. "All exposure is good."
Just when Matt and I were ready to
leave school, Ms. Jones called us all into her office again. "Thanks for
going the extra mile--miles is more like it. I really appreciate it. Luke,
Matt, I know you two are leaving, but take the rest of the day off--all of
you. I've also called down those who are serving as docents--is that the
right word, Luke?" I nodded. "So they can have the rest of the day off as
well. Is transportation a problem?"
Eugene looked at me and Matt and said,
sheepishly, "Guys, I know you want some time together. It's been--I was going
to say a hard, but that is not the problem--a difficult week." Matt was blushing
of course and Ms. Jones was laughing. "But do you think we could hit the
falls?"
I looked at Matt, who did his best
to look like a pouty kid, but his eyes gave him away. "Matt, Eugene and Bill
all have cars. Transportation is no problem," I said.
"I've authorized your sign out, so
sign out and enjoy. The others will be waiting in the lobby."
The time at the falls was what we all
needed. Before we had been there too long, Paula started the swimming. Skinny
dipping was the order of the day. "Wonder if Ms. Jones had this in mind,"
Jacob asked as soon as Paula started the race to get naked.
At one point, Mary Kathryn was at the
top of the falls and I knew I had been very accurate in painting her as a
water sprite. And while I wasn't into women sexually, I did appreciate beauty
and Wild Woman was a beauty. As I stood looking at her, Matt walked up, slipped
his arm around my waist and said, "I agree. She's a real beauty. And look
at Michael standing behind her. If that's not love, I don't know what is.
He is absolutely worshiping her and she is unaware of it."
We stayed at the falls until it was
past the time we would have been home. Matt's and Eugene's cell phones were
used to call parents and all had said they thought we deserved the break.
Finally, Bill took Linda, Jacob and Paula home. When they had gone, Michael
said, "I think you four guys probably need some time together," and he and
Mary Kathryn left, walking down the path hand in hand, stopping several times
for a kiss. That sister of mine had made kissing an art! By the time they
were out of sight, the four of us headed for the water. After maybe twenty
minutes, we all flopped down on a blanket. "Luke, Matt, I want to ask a very
personal question or two if it's ok," Eugene said.
"Ok," Matt and I said together.
"Are you two still holding out for
the big night?"
"We sure are," I said.
"Well, we are because Luke maintains
control. I tell you if it were left up to me, Mr. Larsen would no longer
be a virgin," Matt said. "Man, there are times when I would have crawled
his body big time. In fact, that really has me worried." Matt then told the
two about our discussion of next year should we end up separated. "I am really
worried," he said, "that I will be unfaithful to Luke. I know I don't want
to and I know I could never love anyone but Luke, but I get so hot!"
"The reason I asked was because...well,
you know Larry and I have tried to start over--well, I know I can't be a
virgin again, but you know what I mean. And Matt, you're dad is right once
you have started, even with how we started, it has really been difficult
not to go all the way every time we get beyond the kissing stage. Maybe you
need to think about that."
"Look, I know that being without Matt
is going to be hard and I am sure that being without sex with Matt once we
have gone all the way will be even harder. I know we both will be tempted,
but that's going to be true as long as we live. We'll just have to work at
it. And when it is all said and done, if--and I said IF--one of us is unfaithful,
we will still love each other and I am sure we love each other enough to
survive."
"Well, I just wanted both of you to
know that as hard as it is to refrain from sex, it is harder after you start.
But of course, my only experience is refraining from sex with someone I love
more than I do my life...The big day's approaching, right!"
"YES!!!" Matt exclaimed, May 31."
"And you have talked with Dr. Bailey?"
Larry asked. "We did and I sure wish we had done before, I mean even after
I rap..."
"Let it go, Larry."
"Before we started having sex. To tell
you the truth, we both hurt each other and not just when we were having anal
intercourse. I guess we both thought that hurting was just a part of it and
that we had been born knowing what to do. Have you been doing what she advised
you to do in preparation?"
Matt and I had both read sheets on
oral and anal sex Margaret had given us and made sure we understood them,
but we had never discussed what we were doing in response. I immediately
knew that Matt was doing all the things on the sheet because he turned bright
red. I even felt my face getting a warm glow." Larry laughed, "I guess those
blushes answer that question. Well, if you don't mind, I think I'll take
my babe and this blanket and go down stream a bit for some heavy making out.
We have been almost as chaste as monks since the hectic rush started."
As two of disappeared around a bend
in the river, Matt was on top of me, his hair creating a special world in
this special place. He started kissing me with abandon, his tongue invading
my mouth giving me the taste of my Lakota warrior. As he continued his passionate
kissing, he slipped his Lakota arrow between my thighs and started thrusting
it in and out. Since he was leaning forward, each thrust also gave my Nordic
sword a powerful thrust. I reached behind him and pulled his hips into mine
as my fingers spread his cheeks. I was able to hold him to myself and brush
his rosebud with a finger as he continued humping me wildly. His mouth left
mine and he started sucking a place on my shoulder. Suddenly I felt my finger
slip into him and as it did, he pushed forward, bit my shoulder hard and
I felt his hot seed spill between my legs and over my balls. As he continued
erupting, he bit harder and through clinched teeth groaned loudly, "Yonghon
Tongmu, I love you!" over and over.
His thrusting had brought me close
to the edge and his hot seed pushed me over. I too, shouted as my climax
hit me, taking away my breath and making me see whirling stars, "Damn, Sarang
Hanun Pomul, damn!" We lay, Matt still atop my body, resting from spent passion
in the afterglow of the first real sexual release we had given each other
in what seemed like years. Gradually we recovered and Matt started, once
again, smothering my mouth with kisses, less lustful, but hardly less passionate.
"Sarang Hanun Pomul, how could I ever be unfaithful to someone who gives
me the pleasure you give me with your body? Dark Angel, I cannot even imagine
making love to anyone except you. You are my very life," I said.
Matt raised his head, his hair still
covering us, smiled and looked into my eyes. "You better not because you
and your body belong to me. And to be honest, I feel the same way, Bright
Angel." Matt rolled off my body and we lay, side by side, holding each other
and exchanging sweet, gentle kisses. "Luke, Babe," he said and he looked
at me, "at least this time you'll not have any explaining to do about a hickey
unless you're shirtless then it might be hard to explain teeth marks," he
laughed.
As always, it seemed, time had flown
by and there were obligations. I yelled to Eugene and Larry, "If you guys
haven't finished for the day, you better hurry up if you want to eat before
confirmation class.
The two reappeared, Larry carrying
the blanket, holding hands and stopping for a kiss several times. "From the
shouting, I think we were just about on the same schedule," he laughed. "Now
I suggest a quick swim because I see the two of you are as big a mess as
Eugene and I."
After the swim as we were getting dressed,
Matt said, "I really have no reason to go into St. Mary's with you tonight,
but do you want me to go?"
"Of course I want you with me always,
but don't you think it would be a good idea if you spent some time with your
family tonight? I plan to eat and spend what little time is left with mine.
I have hardly seem Mom and Dad for what seems like months. I can go in with
Michael and Wild Woman."
"I hate to agree with you, but you're
right. What about afterward?"
"Don't get me wrong, Babe, but I think
I'll come back and spend the night at my place in my bed alone. Tomorrow
is a big and long day."
"Again, you're right, much as I hate
it. See you for a run in the morning?"
"You bet, Lover." I said as I kissed
Matt. We agreed since Saturday would be a long hard day, we'd sleep in until
8:00.
When I left the house with Mary Kathryn
for the morning run, the day was perfect--blue skies, no clouds and bright
May sunshine. Matt was waiting for us at the end of his front walk and we
could see impatient Michael running toward us. When he reached us, he gave
Mary Kathryn a good morning kiss and Matt said, "Ok, ok, let's get on with
the serious business." Michael grabbed Mary Kathryn and planted another kiss
on her. "I meant the other serious business," Matt chided. "Let's run."
Given the day we had ahead, we only
ran two miles and when we returned to Michael's place, Margaret met us and
said, "We're all having breakfast at the Greywolfs'. Get your showers and
get dressed and meet there."
"Luke, there's no reason for you to
go home," Matt said. "Shower time!"
We showered, taking our time washing
each other and, yes, playing around.
When we got down, everyone was present--including
Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson--and we made short work of breakfast and
were all ready to go to St. Mary's by 10:00.
When we arrived, the rest of the Fellowship
was present, along with Millie and Paula's and Larry's mothers, whom I had
invited. Uncle Michael met us at the outside entrance to the Common Hall.
"I have turned on the lights and everything is ready, Luke."
"Ok, when we go in, I will unveil the
major piece in the Common Hall. After you have seen it, the docents will
take you through the other galleries until you are ready to go to the final
one. There is a work to be unveiled there as well. I have catalogues for
all of you so you can read or ask the docents or both."
Luke
AN EXHIBITION
OF THE ART OF LUKE HANS LARSEN
It is said that an artist, if
asked to explain a work, will simply point to the work itself. While
I believe my work can and will stand on its own, much of it is extremely
personal and I believe that someone viewing a work will have a deeper
appreciation of the piece if some of its history is known. Accordingly,
each piece -- or in some cases a collection -- is shown in this
catalog and in many cases a simple statement made concerning it
as a piece of art. Following that are comments which you may or
may not read as you see fit. They will, I believe, open a new depth
for anyone viewing any of the works.
There are many to whom I owe
much for their help in making this exhibition possible. However,
there are some who must receive public acknowledgment and my deepest
thanks and appreciation. Literally, without their help, this exhibition
would never have been. Mrs. Millicent Willingham demanded that I
produce a worthwhile exhibition and, when money proved a problem,
took away that excuse by providing funds. Further, she handled all
the publicity for the event and arranged for two receptions following
the recital concert and the opening of the exhibition. Mr. Thomas
Washington of Lexington Foundry provided materials and labor for
the casting of the three bronze statues in the major exhibition piece.
Without Herr Hans Dietrich the materials and labor would have been
worthless because he provided the expertise needed to cast the bronzes.
Uncle Michael Sanders, who was only recently reunited with his brother
David Andrews, volunteered to place his years of experience at my
disposal in setting up the exhibition and handling any dealer interested
in my work. Finally, Mr. John Stephenson, my art teacher since junior
high, helped me understand that life requires more than bread and
butter; it also requires art. For any acclaim this exhibition may
receive, much belongs to him. And, finally, to The Family
who gave me life in the beginning and continues to sustain it, this
exhibition is dedicated.
Luke Hans Larsen
The Galleries
The exhibition is arranged in
four galleries. The main gallery is in the Common Hall and the three
smaller galleries are in three classrooms across the hall from the
main gallery.
The Main
Gallery
The exhibition's major piece Surrounded
by So Great a Cloud is set up in the center of the main gallery.
The other works in the main gallery are described, beginning at
the outside entry and moving clockwise around the hall.
When everyone gathered around the major piece in the main
gallery, I removed the veil covering it and, as I did, Mr. Stephenson
turned it on.
Surrounded by So Great
a Cloud -- A Moving Sculpture: The sculpture consists of three
bronze castings -- made using the lost wax process; an etched glass
panel -- etched using chemical etching, sandblasting and diamond
drill carving; all mounted in a steel framework. The pieces are
mounted in a manner which allows them to be moved by small electric
motors in the base of the work. The bronze castings are of the three
families which make up The Family, my extended family. They
are on a scale of approximately one-to-two and average three feet
in height. The glass panel is three by five feet by two inches thick.
The Artist's Comments: Of all my work, Surrounded
by So Great a Cloud has the most complete history of its evolution
available for all to see. On the reverse of the panels behind the
sculpture are the sketches I made as the idea evolved. These range
from formal sketches in a sketch book to those made on the edge
of class notes, to sketches made on school napkins, to several made
with felt-tip pen on toilet tissue! Originally, the sculpture was to
be a single three-sided sculpture in clay with one side devoted
to each of the families which make up The Family. As I sketched
and thought about the project, the concept evolved into the sculpture
you see before you.
While I was thinking about
the sculpture, I ran across an article on the lost wax process of
casting bronze and became fascinated with the possibility of having
the figures cast. I soon learned there were two major problems connected
with using the ancient lost wax process. The first was finding someone
who was expert in using the process and the second was money. Fortunately,
both were solved at the same time when Mr. John Stephenson, my art
teacher, put me in contact with Mr. Thomas Washington of the Lexington
Foundry. While the present foundry does not have the expertise to
do the casting, Mr. Washington asked a retired craftsman, Herr Hans
Dietrich, to look at my clay sculpture. Herr Dietrich graciously
came out of retirement to do the casting, and Mr. Washington provided
the materials and labor. Neither man would accept payment for their
work and the sculpture was made possible through their skill and
generosity.
About the time I had decided
to cast the statues in bronze, if possible, I recalled a phrase
used in the Mass on All Saints' Day: "surrounded by so great a cloud
of witnesses". The phrase lodged in my mind and I began to think,
not of a cloud of witnesses surrounding me and The Family,
but the cloud of people who surround us with their love and concern.
I very much wanted to capture that idea and honor those as well
as The Family. If I could come up with a way to do that,
I would solve another problem. Elizabeth Andrews, wife of David
and mother of Michael, died two or so years ago. I was struggling with
how to include her when the picture was further complicated by the
marriage of David to Dr. Margaret Bailey, who had earlier been accepted
as a member of The Family. The answer came as I was walking
down the street window shopping. I suddenly noticed the reflection
of people in the glass of the window. I would, I decided, do a glass
panel with the faces of those who surrounded The Family.
Again, expense almost eliminated the idea since a sheet of glass
large enough to do what I envisioned and the tools and materials
to do the etching were expensive. When Mrs. Millicent Willingham
gave me money to carry out the project, I was terrified because
I had never done work in glass before and knew I would have to teach myself
and, more terrifying, had to be successful in doing the panel. Fortunately,
I loved every minute of the learning process and was, I believe,
successful in carrying it out. Many citizens of Concord may be seen
in the panel and at the top is Elizabeth who, The Family
knows, still surrounds us with her love.
The final figures are very
much as I originally conceived them, except each family became a
separate piece and they were cast in bronze from clay sculptures.
The faces and torsos of the figures are quite detailed, but the
balance of each figure is intentionally unfinished because I believe
that at any point in our life we are "unfinished." The figures,
it will be noted, are mounted on a revolving steel platform around
and above which the etched glass panel, mounted in a steel ring, revolves
as well, "surrounding" The Family.
At the close of this exhibition,
Surrounded by So Great a Cloud will find a permanent home
at the James Sanders' Hospitality House where, it is to be hoped,
those staying to be near loved ones in the Concord Hospice will
find themselves surrounded by love and concern.
As soon as the veil was removed, there was absolute silence in the room,
so much so I wondered what was going on. I soon found out as I looked
around. The expressions on the faces of the people I loved told
me I had struck a chord in each of them. I watched as tears formed
in the eyes of Michael and David. Mom and Dad both reached out and
placed an arm around my waist. Matt walked up behind me and kissed
me on the neck then put his arms around me. Yong Jin and Greywolf
were suddenly holding hands as David reached behind himself and
took Margaret's hand in his. Mary Kathryn walked in front of me
and pulled my arms around her waist. Silence still reigned. Finally
Michael spoke, his voice choked with emotion, "There's Mom, still
watching over us all." Once he spoke, others started speaking.
"There's Chelsea and Gladys and Dr. Walker. Without
their having watched over us, this wonderful piece would never have
been," Matt whispered. Then, in a voice tinged with a some anger,
he continued, "Luke Larsen, how could you have ever dared think
of taking your talent from us and the world? How could you have
dared take this from us? How could you dare?" The "silence in church"
atmosphere which had prevailed was broken and others started naming
the people in the cloud: Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson, Ms. Jones,
the entire Fellowship, Mr. Swartz, Fr. Tom and about a dozen others.
"Luke, if this was all you had done, your
exhibition and your stature as an artist would have been firmly
established," Greywolf said.
After everyone had stood looking
at the piece for a very long time -- the glass panel had made two
or three revolutions -- Mom said, "I think we need to kinda stay
together as we move through the rest of this exhibition". The Family
agreed -- of course the Fellowship, including Michael and Mary Kathryn,
had seen all the other works in the gallery and hung back so Mom
and Dad, and all the others could see everything.
The Family:
A series of eleven
paintings portraying the members of the artist's extended family. While
there are slight variations in the size of the eleven canvases,
all are approximately four feet high and conform to the Greek idea
of the Golden Section, a height to width ratio which is expressed
by the formula w/h = h/w + h, or about 3/5. All except one have
a similar background, a grayed off-white which helps each figure
seem to stand out from that background. The eleven use the full
range of acrylic painting techniques from what may first appear
to be pen and ink drawing through the delicate colors and edges
of watercolor to paint applied in the manner of oils.The figures are painted to provide some
insight into how the artist sees the members of The Family,
his relationship to each person and often the person's ethnic background.
Each canvas is complete unto itself but the whole is greater than
its parts in that, taken together, the eleven paintings picture
The Family -- not just individual members.
"I think each of you will recognize the subjects of The
Family," I said.
Beowulf -- Jens Larsen:
Jens Larsen,
the artist's father, is of Scandinavian background and, accordingly,
is portrayed as Beowulf, the great Scandinavian hero. He is pictured
in full battle gear, except for his helmet which he holds in his
left hand. The bloody sword in his right hand suggests he is resting
after having killed another monster. The early Anglo-Saxons were
great metal workers in iron, bronze, and gold. Gold ornaments were
frequently enameled in bright and beautiful colors. To accomplish
the look of such work in this painting, a great deal of gold leaf
has been used, along with extremely high-gloss acrylic paint.
The Artist's Comments: My father is a modern Anglo-Saxon
hero to me. His monsters -- it is true -- are not external, but
he has done battle against internal monsters, monsters which challenge
his loyalties. I was extremely interested in including the beautiful
"duck" helmet uncovered in the Sutton Hoo excavations, but to have
Beowulf wearing it would have completely obscured Jens' face. At
the same time as I struggled with how to show his face and the helmet,
Jens had what was probably his greatest struggle and, when I realized
he had -- again -- slain the monster, I suddenly thought about presenting
him as resting immediately after his victory -- helmet in hand.
The ornaments and helmet are based upon those uncovered in the excavations
at Sutton Hoo, England, which have provided much of our knowledge
of the skills of the Vikings.
As Dad approached "Beowulf", he stopped quickly, looked at the catalogue,
looked at the painting and his eyes filled with tears. "Luke, you
have honored me far beyond what I deserve. Matt asks how you could
dare think of taking your life, I ask myself how I could have dared
to treat you as I did. And, my God, I even thought of disowning
you. Son, can you -- and Matt -- ever forgive me?" He was crying
openly, something I had seen him do very few times in my life.
"Dad, I hope the painting answers
your question." Dad wrapped me in his arms and hugged me so tightly
I thought I would stop breathing. "Thanks, Dad," I said as he released
me. He then embraced Matt in an equally tight bearhug.
German Tavern Maid --
Gabrielle Larsen: Gabriel, the artist's mother,
is German -- Bavarian to be exact -- and is portrayed as a Bavarian
tavern maid of, perhaps, the eighteenth or nineteenth century. She
is dressed in Bavarian dress -- a low-cut white blouse with puffed
sleeves and a richly embroidered skirt and vest. She is shown carrying
a tray laden with food above her head with one hand and steins of
beer in the other. The tavern and patrons are done with light brush
strokes in earth tones, only slightly darker than the background.
The Artist's Comments: Originally when I thought about
a painting of my mother, I decided to present her as Brunnhilde,
the heroine in Wagner's "Ring of the Nibelrung". In fact, I even
started that painting. I had chosen Brunnhilde to be Gabrielle because
of my mother's ferocious loyalty and devotion to The Family,
and her willingness to sacrifice on their behalf. That incomplete painting
is exhibited directly below the final representation of Gabrielle.
However, as I painted, Brunnhilde seemed too war-like to represent
Gabrielle. I then saw her in terms of her care for The Family
and realized she was more like a tavern maid -- youthful, joyful,
playful and dedicated to seeing that the physical needs of its members
are met while being a good listener and one who did not allow her
personal concerns to overshadow her concern for family members.
Also, I knew that a tavern maid was there to serve, but that there
were limits beyond which she would not budge -- Gabrielle, my mother!
Finally, I see my mother as a beautiful young woman and the tavern
maid is surely that!
When the group moved to German Tavern
Maid, Mom immediately started laughing. "Luke, how did you know
I once wanted to be a tavern maid? Some of my happiest memories
are of going to the tavern with my dad and watching the maids waltzing
around, keeping the customers' hands off while flirting like mad.
It seemed so much fun!" She, then, looked at the catalogue and,
after reading what I had written, "Nice to know your grown son still thinks
of you as a beautiful young woman!" she said as she kissed me. "And
I am really glad you didn't finish the Brunnhilde one. I always
thought she was too serious and a pushy broad." Her laugh proved
the tavern maid was an accurate representation of my mom.
Water Sprite of the
River Falls -- Mary Kathryn Larsen: Mary Kathryn, my sister, is portrayed
as a water sprite at the falls on the Sequoyah River which runs
through the families' farms. She is seen here, nude, sitting atop
Lookout Rock, her golden curls blowing in the wind. Youthful, obviously,
but definitely a well-developed young woman. An acrylic water color
technique was chosen to emphasize the delicate nature of the creature
and the beauty of the falls. At the same time, there is enough color
and substance to indicate her strength.
The Artist's Comments: Mary Kathryn is definitely
a water sprite and no other figure would have done her justice because
she is -- as water sprites are -- playful, often mischievous and
very beautiful. While water sprites are expected to be nude, Mary
Kathryn's nudity is also a nostalgic look back to the time when
the children of the family went skinny dipping at the falls and,
at risk of being strangled by Mary Kathryn and my mother, that still sometimes
happens! A beautiful, spirited young woman, Mary Kathryn is sometimes
known as Wild Woman and even that element can be seen in this water
sprite who is certainly not one of those Victorian "fairies". This
is a full-blooded, full-spirited water sprite. To my eye, she is
completely at home at the falls.
"Luke, I want to buy that piece on an installment plan!" Michael said
as the rest of the family saw it for the first time. "I figure at a
dollar a week, my great-great grandson will finally get you paid!"
"I hope you four don't think we haven't known that skinny dipping is
still often the order of the day," Yong Jin said. "Luke, it's a magnificent
work and really captures Mary Kathryn's spirit and beauty."
Runner, A Self
Portrait -- Luke Hans Larsen: The artist is portrayed as
a runner running down a country road, approaching a huge old oak
on the side of the road. The technique used is essentially that
of poster art, but with greater detail in the setting, especially
in the large oak tree. The runner is running "flat out" and can almost
be heard shouting as he runs.
The Artist's Comments: I have always been reluctant
to do a self-portrait. Somehow or other it has always seemed egotistical
to me. When I realized that the series would be incomplete without
one, I first decided to use the caricature Millie Willingham --
who dares defy Millie? -- demanded for the posters announcing the
event, but I realized it was not in keeping with the series. After
working very late one night, I was reluctant to get up and get dressed
for the daily run the kids in the family do together. However, when
I got up and got moving, I realized that the morning run was one
of the things which bonded the Gang of Four -- the name the four
kids have given themselves -- together. And, more than that, I realized
on that morning I was alive. In that moment of realization I was,
in the words of C. S. Lewis, "surprised by joy". When I again approached
the task of painting myself, I wanted to capture both the runner
and the joy I felt. A part of that joy came not only from just being
alive, but also from where I was. For The Family, the old
oak shown in the background is a kind of symbol of our having taken
root and growing in the beautiful area of the county where we live.
"Luke, do you know the Navajo run to greet the rising sun, shouting because
they are alive?" Greywolf asked. "In fact, on one of their days
of celebration, men run twenty or so miles shouting all the way
because they are alive and are blessed. You are so alive in that
painting and, Luke, you have the depth and strength of that oak.
Never forget that. It will serve you well if you ever begin to question
yourself, I mean your strength and depth of spirit and character."
"Yonghon Tongmu, I'll promise to play
More for you tonight in exchange for that picture of the
man who makes that song mean so much to me," Matt said.
I planned to give Matt the painting
if he wanted it, but I couldn't miss this. "I'm sure you wouldn't
dare add something to your program at this late date but, Sarang
Hanun Pomul, it's a deal!" I laughed, knowing that the program for
tonight was fixed in concrete. Nonetheless, I couldn't resist kissing
the one who inspires me to sing More.
Lakota Medicine Man
with St. Michael -- Patanka St. Michael Greywolf: Greywolf is the head of the Greywolf
family and, while it is never discussed or even mentioned, head
of The Family as well. Here he is seen as a Lakota medicine
man, illustrative of his Lakota background, dressed in a buffalo
robe complete with a buffalo head. His well-known long hair is shown
hanging free and his face is painted in a traditional pattern of
red, black and white. He carries an eagle's claw in his right hand
and burning sweet grass in his left. He has several eagle feathers
in his hair and wears a choker of bone and pipestone. His chest
is covered with a breastplate of bone. The technique for this part
of the painting is similar to an oil painting which allows for showing
great detail. Standing behind Greywolf is St. Michael -- done with
a much lighter touch, but with great detail as well. St. Michael
holds a shield to protect, not himself, but faint figures seen in
the background, and he stands with sword raised.
The Artist's Comments: There was never any question
of how Greywolf would show up in this exhibition. His name made
it very clear. Raised by his Lakota grandfather until the grandfather's
death, Greywolf was taken in by an uncle who abused him horribly.
Eventually he was rescued by an Episcopal priest. After it became
clear he needed healing from the abuse of his childhood, the priest took
him to a Lakota medicine man. Near the end of his stay with the
medicine man, he went on a vision quest during which he was given
his Lakota name Patanka. While the word means buffalo, it means
much more to the Lakota. Patanka, for a Lakota, holds the fullness
of one who protects the weak and provides for all. When he returned
to the priest, he sought baptism and was given a Christian name
which resonates with his Lakota one -- St. Michael, defender of
the weak and struggling. No greater honor can be bestowed on a Lakota
than being given an eagle feather -- this is the reason Greywolf
is shown with several in his hair. Should anyone doubt that Greywolf
is well named, they need only ask someone who was present when the
former principal of Independence High School made derogatory statements
about a young man before the entire student body!
To the best of my ability, the
symbols and clothing of Greywolf as a medicine man are correct.
I knew what he was to be in this series of paintings, but assuring
the accuracy of the representation required considerable research.
I hope I did it well.
There were no comments on Greywolf's picture for the longest
time. Then Greywolf said, "Luke, you must have done some serious
research because there couldn't be a better representation of a
medicine man. I must say, though, I'm afraid you have given me more
power than I have, but I think Matt has inherited the spirit of
a medicine man..." He was silent for a moment, then said quietly,
"One of my greatest wishes is that you and Matt will have an opportunity
to meet a real one. They have powers -- great powers -- which I
don't understand, but don't need to. The power is just in them."
Korean Mother -- Yong
Jin Greywolf: Yong
Jin is Korean. She is shown here in a hanbok, the national dress
of Korea. Each stage in a woman's life dictates the color and trim
of the hanbok. Yong Jin is shown as a Korean mother. Her hanbok
is a deep, rich blue with white bands embroidered in purple at the
end of the sleeves and around the neck, announcing she is the mother
of a son. Her hair style is that of a married woman. Her dress and
hair style both show she is yongban, a member of the Korean aristocracy.
The Artist's Comments: Because Yong Jin is obviously
a lady, I chose to show her as yongban, a member of the Korean aristocracy,
regardless of whether or not her Korean bloodline supports that
position. She is dressed as the mother of a son -- again, not only
because she is, but also because it characterizes her. She is the
mother of a son for whom she sacrifices, but also for whom she has
high expectations and on whom she places high demands -- gently,
but firmly. But Yong Jin is not just the mother to Matthew, she is also
a demanding mother to the other sons and daughter of The Family,
never expecting or accepting less than the best any of them has
to offer in any of their life's endeavors. As a teacher, she expects
and demands the same of her students. She is shown laughing because,
as she once said, Koreans are the Italians of Asia and her frequent
laugh, sense of humor and enjoyment of conversation support the
claim.
Originally I planned to show
her standing before Namsan, the sacred mountain in Seoul, done in
an ink and brush style. While that style is seen often in Korea,
I changed my mind after seeing a picture of Kunjongjon, part of
the Kyongbokkung palace complex. The use of the Korean decorative
coloring, Tanchong, used on the building is especially beautiful
to me. The seemingly simple yet complex patterns are painted in
vivid colors of red, orange, blue, yellow and green, plus others
based on iron compounds. The very brilliant colors and seemingly
simple yet complex patterns were Yong Jin for me. Thus, she is shown before
the Throne Room of Kyongbokkung which is decorated with Tanchong.
"Obviously, more research, Luke. And I am glad you placed me before Kunjongjon.
It means so much to anyone who loves Korea. One day the whole complex
may, once again, be freed from the Japanese building erected to
stop the flow of chi and, maybe then, Korea will be whole again.
And I appreciate your ignoring my "tainted" bloodline. I am proud
of it even though it makes me a mongrel to most Koreans.
Shaman -- Matthew
Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf: This portrait of Matt was an
extremely simple one to conceive, but very difficult to execute.
The painting reflects Matthew's Lakota and Korean spirituality in
that it is of a divided shaman, one side a Korean shaman and the other
a Lakota medicine man. Unlike the painting of Greywolf as a medicine
man, which is done in great detail using color, this one is done
entirely in black and white, appearing as a pen and ink drawing.
Except for the face, the work is almost an abstract. The two sides
blend together in the face so Matthew is clearly visible, but the
balance of the painting is vague and unclear because Matthew's vocation
as a shaman is -- to me and, I suspect to him -- vague and unclear.The Artist's Comments: There has never been any
doubt in my mind that Matthew Greywolf can perform magic since the
first time I heard him play the organ. And as the years passed,
I sensed a great depth of spirituality in Matt. Once, when he told
his mother he could sense a presence before a person came into the
room, she told him he was from a family in which, for five hundred years
at least, there had been shaman -- odd in Korea where most shaman
are women. Later, when Greywolf spoke of a Lakota medicine man --
another version of the shaman -- I sensed a resonance within Matthew
with that tradition. As soon as I thought about doing The Family,
I realized Matthew would have to be presented as a dual shaman.
"As I said," Greywolf commented when he saw the painting of Matt, "I
think Matt has inherited some, if not all, of the power of a medicine
man."
"He definitely inherited power from
his Korean shaman ancestors," Yong Jin said confidently. "More than
that, I am convinced he has also empowered the Gang of Four. That
explains how all four knew about their conception."
"Well, I can't come up with a better explanation,"
Jens said.
"I was sure when Luke told me he knew when
Matt was approaching. Now with Michael's positive statement that
Margaret is carrying twin girls..." Yong Jin mused.
"She certainly is," Michael was quick to
state.
"I guess this is as good a time as any to
make the announcement," Margaret laughed. "I found out yesterday
that he is at least half right. I am carrying twins."
"Twins and specifically Kathryn Elizabeth and Mary Margaret to be specific,"
Michael said in a definite no-questions-allowed voice.
An American Pioneer
-- David Andrews: David Andrews is of Scottish-Irish
ancestry which goes back to before the founding of this nation.
The fiercely independent people from which David sprang settled
in the mountains of Appalachia and eventually some members pushed
westward. The painting is done in the style of Norman Rockwell, to many
THE painter of American life and ideals. Long dismissed as "just
a commercial artist", Mr. Rockwell's work has recently won wide
acceptance and acclaim in the art world with exhibitions in major
American cities. David is dressed in buckskins and is wearing a
coonskin cap headgear like that made famous years ago by the movie
"Davy Crockett". He is leaning on a Kentucky long rifle, peering
off into the distance as though listening for danger or hearing
a call to adventure.
The Artist's Comments: This is the only work in
my exhibition which consciously seeks to imitate another's work
and style, but when I decided David had to be portrayed as an early
American pioneer, Norman Rockwell immediately came to mind. While
Mr. Rockwell worked in oils, this -- as most of my painting -- is
done in acrylics, but using the techniques I would have used had I been
working in oils. I chose to present David as a pioneer, not only
because of his background but also because, as a male nurse, he
pioneered in that field. Further, David was a pioneer in getting
the first serious EMS team and equipment for Concord and the surrounding
areas.
"Luke, I see you don't miss a trick do you?" My granddad would have been
proud of that painting and the fact that you chose the pioneer image.
He never grew tired of telling me stories of those folks who struggled,
demanding freedom in -- and a living from -- these mountains. Thanks,"
David said.
Guardian Spirit -- Elizabeth
Andrews: The
painting of Elizabeth is the only painting in the series which has
a different background. Here, instead of the grayed off-white, it
is a blue so pale it may appear at first as white. The figure is
almost invisible, having been done in a blue only ever-so-slightly
darker than the background. The figure is of Elizabeth Andrews as
she appeared in her most robust youth. She is seen standing on Lookout
Rock at the river falls, looking down on four figures playing on
the beach -- The Family's four children at six or seven years
of age. Careful examination will reveal that Elizabeth is smiling,
happy, observing the children at play.
The Artist's Comments: How does one paint a spirit?
How can someone who is no longer alive be portrayed as a presence
as real as a living person? This was the problem presented to me
when I approached a painting of Elizabeth Andrews. After years of
happiness with little heartache or pain, it almost seemed The
Family was required to pay back bills when Elizabeth discovered she
had cancer. Her struggle was brave, but the disease wrapped her
in pain and took her from us -- first because of her disease and
pain and then, finally, when her death released her from her suffering.
Yet, to a person, we know Elizabeth is still a part of us, loving
and watching over us. As I thought about how to go about the task,
I recalled many happy moments with Elizabeth, but kept coming back
to the idea that she was watching over us. It was this which reminded
me of the times she stood on Lookout Rock at the top of the falls,
watching over the four children playing below. That was Elizabeth.
In deciding to convey the idea of her as guardian spirit, I saw
her -- faintly -- in that place watching over us in happy days.
To achieve a distinction from the living family, I decided to change
the background color of this canvas and to use the slightest possible
difference in color between the background and the figures. It was
only when I had finished the painting and was examining it that
I noticed Elizabeth was smiling.
"Luke, I'm really glad you included Mom. I wouldn't have thought of your
doing so, but I should have known you would," Michael whispered
with tears in his eyes. "I know she watches over me. Most of the
time I don't think about her as much as I did, but I do miss her
terribly at times."
"And you should," Margaret said as she
placed her arms around Michael's shoulders. It was the first time
I had ever seen her really seem like a mother to him. He buried
his face in her shoulder and had a good cry as David embraced the
two of them.
Greek Warrior -- Michael
Andrews:
Michael is a handsome young man in every sense of the word and he is a
warrior for justice and right. This painting joins the two. On the
usual grayed off-white background is seen a Greek style vase in
black with white decorations, Michael as a Greek warrior, spear
raised, fighting off a snarling dog -- the dog of prejudice and
injustice.
The Artist's Comments: As a part of the application
for a summer art camp I attended two years ago, applicants had to
submit a "study of the human body". When the campers arrived, I
was somewhat chagrined to discover I was the only one who had done
a nude! Others had drawings or paintings of hands, faces, sketches
of other parts of the body and only one other had a full figure and it
was a pencil drawing of a draped woman. I had done a nude of Michael
in charcoal and pastels. I recalled that work and decided that,
in order to show both Michael's physical beauty and his passion
for justice, there was only one possible answer: the painting you
see -- Michael as a Greek warrior. Preliminary sketches I did were
not satisfactory for my concept but, as I was trying to decide on
what approach to use, my sister asked me a question about "The Odyssey"
which she was reading for an English class. When she showed me the
passage, I noticed a small illustration of a Greek vase on the page.
The idea of a Greek vase painting came to me and, at first, I dismissed
it as pretty far out. However, as I started sketching, I came to
see the possibilities. When the painting was finished, I found it
struck the very note for me that Michael in his youthful eagerness
for right does in reality.
"There's a real man and he's mine, all mine," Mary Kathryn said as she
made a great pointing gesture toward the painting and pulled Michael's
lips to hers for a mouth-filling tongue kiss.
Mother Watching Over
a Sick Child -- Margaret Bailey Andrews: The painting of Margaret was done as
a period piece. The scene is a bed in a log cabin with a child lying,
back to the viewer, half-covered, and a woman, Margaret, sitting
beside the bed. She is seen in profile by the dim light from a fireplace
and the candle sitting on a table beside the bed. The fire and candle
cast a glow over her face and the bare back of the child. While
the child is obviously a nearly grown young man, she sees him as
a child. What can be seen of her face expresses both her deep concern
and her boundless hope as she watches into the night. The colors
used are muted earth tones illuminated by the warm glow of fire
and candlelight.
The Artist's Comments: The world knows Margaret
Bailey Andrews as a doctor, and that she is. However, The Family
came to know her in more than a professional role when she was called
upon to help save the life of one of the family's children, me,
who lay near death. While the child in the painting is obviously
a young man, the concern shown by Margaret is that of a mother watching
over her child. I chose the setting to reflect Margaret's own heritage
as a child of mountain pioneers -- as is her husband David -- and
the courage of those women who left the comforts of the "civilized"
part of colonial America to follow their husbands and families into
the wilderness. The darkness surrounding the two is intended to
indicate the seriousness of the situation, but the glow of fire
and candle suggests hope and happier days ahead.
Millie, who had been standing behind The Family, said, "Beautifully
done, Luke. Beautifully done. And for those of us who know you,
there is no doubt who the young man is. Margaret, you did the world
a great service when you kept this young fellow alive."
"I was only a part of what kept him alive, a very small part. Matt has
to take most of the credit. He may not be a medicine man or a shaman,
but no one will ever convince me otherwise," Margaret responded.
The Artist's Comments
on the Series: When
I first thought about painting the members of The Family,
I intended to do rather traditional, almost photographic, likenesses
but the more I thought about it, the more it became a spiritual
journey into what The Family is and means to me. I realized, as
soon as I started painting, that I had undertaken a major project
-- since the entire series had to be completed in a three-month
period. Often it seemed I would never complete the paintings but,
when they were finished, I realized that I knew and loved The
Family as I had not done before. That, alone, made the exercise
worthwhile for me. I hope the results are worthwhile for the viewer.
"Luke, I don't think I have
ever known a family who has been honored as much, and certainly
not more, than you have honored yours in these works. Not only are
the paintings and the sculpture outstanding art -- and while I'm
no expert, I know they are -- but they also speak of a deep love
and affection not often found among today's families, I'm afraid,"
Ms. Wright said.
When we had finished with The Family,
all those present read their catalogues and spent time where they
wanted looking at the rest of the work in the main gallery.
Exercises, Techniques,
and Methods: On
the wall opposite The Family are displayed works by the artist
produced as required exercises in art classes and art camp, experiments
with techniques and tools, and application of various methods. These
will be described briefly beginning near the back wall and moving
clockwise.
A Vase: Done as an assignment in a
pottery class, this is the only example of wheel thrown pottery found
in the exhibition and the only one owned by the artist. He says, "I
must have thrown a ton of clay before I achieved anything worth
keeping. When I had created this pot, I was finished with trying
to throw pots." The pot stands twelve inches high and is similar
in shape to American Indian pots. The glaze has a white slip underglaze
covered by a terra cotta color opaque final glaze which has been
engraved to allow the white slip glaze to show through. The design
is based on pre-Columbian Mayan patterns of circles and curves.
Michael -- A Nude Study:
This charcoal
and pastel study of Michael Andrews was part of the inspiration
for Greek Warrior in The Family series. Michael is shown standing,
arms outstretched, in the exuberance of youth. His strength and
physical beauty are apparent, as is his joy at being alive. (Artist's note: This sketch is the property of
Mary Kathryn Larsen and was graciously loaned by her for this exhibition.)
The River Falls at Night:
Another class
assignment, this time for a photography class, resulted in this
picture. The assignment was to capture a night scene. The artist chose
not to do an obvious one -- a brightly lighted scene -- but to attempt
to capture a special place, the river falls. The final print was
the result of several night's experimentation and at least half
a dozen rolls of film. The length of the exposure is evident from
the track left by the rising moon above the lip of the falls.
Lifeline -- A Montage:
"Using anything
you like, create a montage of your life. You may use photos, magazine
pictures, objects. The only two rules are you may not leave any
of the background showing and you may not use words except those found
on objects or pictures." This was a semester-long class project in
my junior year. The result was much larger and more complicated
than I anticipated but, when I started gathering materials for it,
I found so many things I wanted to include: one of my first baby
shoes, my first book which bears teeth marks proving I attempted
to read it with my mouth, school pictures from the first grade on,
magazine pictures of a bicycle, a report card from sixth grade,
a picture from my junior high prom, a note from Greywolf to my dad
telling him Matt and I had been showing off in Matt's new Jeep and
he was grounding us for six weeks, a number of matchbox cars from
a collection I started in grade school and continue to the present, and
many other things. The actual time line follows a serpentine route
over an entire sheet of plywood.
Costume Designs: These are sketches for some
of the costumes designed for Independence High School's Drama Club's
1993 production of Macbeth. Shown are the battle costumes
of Macbeth and Macduff, Macbeth's costume as king, the costumes of the
three witches, Lady Macbeth's costume -- worn at the beginning of
the play, and her sleep walking costume.
The Artist's Comments: Asked to design the costumes
for Macbeth, I really didn't know where to begin. In the
light of the fact that I was given a free hand, I looked into how
the play had been costumed in recent productions, some using modern
dress. I quickly decided to go with the time of the setting and
started research into the dress of the period. The acrylic watercolor
sketches are the result. The major characters' costumes are pretty
much what one would expect, but the witches offered an opportunity
to experiment. One is dressed in a filmy grey and black costume
which looks much like rags. Another is dressed in a distorted version
of court dress with the expected bright colors and careful fit changed
to muddy browns and yellows and the fit made loose and askew. The
third witch is dressed as a temptress in a clinging gown of translucent
green. All characters are shown on the set which was also my design.
Life, Death and Transformation:
This is a highly
abstract oil, one of the few in the exhibition, which uses color
to signify the three stages in this spirit journey. Moving from
left to right and bottom to top, life is symbolized by green, death by
black and transformation by yellow. The paint has been applied to
the canvas with a palette knife in geometric shapes and swirls.
Each stage blends into the next, moving from the rich green in the
lower left corner to the almost-white yellow in the upper right
corner.
The Artist's Comments: Having gone through a near-death
experience and a transformation, I sought to convey something of
that experience through painting. Clearly, I came to understand,
it was possible only through a metaphor, an abstract, in which colors
represented the journey I had taken. I chose green, the color of
life, to represent my life before the experience. It is the color of
spring, of growth, of life itself since we are utterly dependent upon
the green of plants for our life. The paint has been applied to
the canvas with much texture as life is many textured. When I first
conceived of the painting, I thought of using black for death, but
recalled the actual experience where death appeared as darkness,
but not simply black -- it was a smoky darkness. The paint has been
applied to the canvas in great swirls as if drifting smoke. This
is most noticeable when the color gradually lightens to a dark gray.
As with death, my initial choice of color for the transformed life
was different from the final choice. Initially I had chosen red,
the color of blood. However, as I thought further, the proper color
was yellow, the color of light. Accordingly, the transformation
aspect of the painting ranges from a gray, smoky yellow where it mingles
with death to the very bright and light yellow of the full transformation.
Here the paint has been applied in a manner that suggests rays of
light.
The Fellowship of the
Rings: A
pen and ink drawing of the right hands of an Independence High School
group dedicated to elimination of prejudice and discrimination. All
ten selected Hopi overlay rings as a symbol of their fellowship.
The rings are shown on the hands which form a circle, a fellowship
circle.
The Artist's Comments: Originally calling themselves
by the somewhat arrogant name "The Select Few", Michael Andrews,
Mary Kathryn Larsen -- sophomores, Linda Randolph -- a junior, and
Matthew Greywolf, Paula Wright, Larry Watley, Eugene Willingham
and myself -- seniors -- were a group of high school friends. Contrary
to custom, Michael was persuaded to run for student body president,
usually seen as a junior privilege. During the campaign, Bill Lance joined
the group after Michael's campaign posters were vandalized. Two
of the group had purchased Hopi overlay rings which were admired
by the others and all decided to select and wear Hopi overlay rings
from the collection of Mr. Swartz of Swartz's Jewelry Shop. Bill
Lance, very angry over the vandalizing of Michael's posters, announced
he was withdrawing from the campaign in support of Michael Andrews.
When he made the announcement on the school TV, Bill displayed his
ring and announced that he was a member of "The Fellowship of the
Rings" and the name stuck. Not a part of the original "Fellowship
of the Rings", Jacob McAllister joined the group after the election.
The pen and ink drawing was done from many sketches made during
lunch which the group eats together.
Mentors -- Michael Sanders
and John Stephenson: A pencil drawing of Michael
Sanders and John Stephenson shows the two men working while setting
up this exhibition.
The Artist's Comments: This is my latest work. Mr.
Stephenson has been my art teacher since junior high school. Uncle
Michael has been an art dealer in Charleston for many years and
is a graduate of the Chicago Art Institute. When he came to live
in Concord, he offered to help mount this exhibition. During breaks,
I sketched the two men and then, from memory and the sketches, did this
pencil drawing of the two at work -- my two mentors.
Prom Queen -- Paula
Wright: This
full-length portrait is of Independence High School's 1995 Prom Queen,
Paula Wright. The figure is done using acrylics as one would oils.
The figure stands alone on the canvas before a background of white
with the faintest tinge of green. She is dressed in a red Korean
hanbok with accessories and hair style which might be seen on a
young Korean bride.
The Artist's Comments: Paula did me the honor of
being my prom date for this year's prom. Her dress was kept secret
until I arrived to pick her up. Yong Jin Greywolf and my sister
Mary Kathryn had decided she had the coloring and poise to be beautiful
in Mrs. Greywolf's hanbok. Needless to say, they were correct. After
this exhibition, this portrait is a gift to Paula's mother, Ms.
Sandra Wright.
Mom and Yong Jin got a great kick out of playing "do you remember" as
they looked at the montage. Ms. Wright exclaimed over the painting
of Paula and actually squealed when she read that it was to be hers.
When she did, she ran over and hugged me and gave me a huge kiss.
"Just wish you were available," she laughed. "If Paula didn't grab
you, I think I would try to interest you in an older woman!" Having
been around Matt too long, I blushed.
Uncle Michael and Mr. Stephenson forgot
where they were, I guess, as they stood before the drawing of the
two of them. They were holding hands like two teenagers. "Your first
sale, Luke," Uncle Michael said. "I'm offering $1,500 for the drawing
and if someone else wants it, I'll pay $100 more than their highest
offer. That is mine and John's for the house. And I want Life,
Death and Transformation. I think there will be several offers
for it, so we'll wait about setting a price, but I want it."
"Uncle Michael, I feel I should give
the oil to you for all you have done. And I am definitely giving
you and Mr. Stephenson the drawing. It's your housewarming present.
I would be honored to have you accept it."
"Luke, we would be pleased and honored to accept, wouldn't
we, John?"
"Indeed we would."
The Second
Gallery
The Second Gallery is located
across the hall to the left.
Retrospective:
This gallery
contains examples from throughout the artist's life and needs no explanation.
The Artist's Comments: A retrospective? A not-quite-eighteen-year-old
with a retrospective? That was a question I asked when it was suggested
by my mentors. Both reminded me that a retrospective traces the
development of an artist, regardless of age. Accordingly, Uncle
Michael and Mr. Stephenson asked my parents and members of my extended
family for anything they might have for this exhibit. The two men
made the selection and mounted this display. In the retrospective,
you will see a crayon "drawing" made before I started going to school,
a Thanksgiving turkey made from a hand print in kindergarten and
other things I drew, made and painted since I was three or so until
the present. It is a kind of "empty the attic" exhibition which I hope
you enjoy.
I knew the general public would not get the kick out of the retrospective
members of The Family did. They were all soon busy playing,
"Do You Remember When?"
"There's Luke's masks of the three
other kids," Mom said. "Remember when he did those? The first time
he was doing Michael, he forgot to oil his face well and we had
to chip off the plaster. Michael was doing his best to scream and
yell, but his face was all sealed behind plaster!"
"There's his first oil. He painted
that in Matt's room -- I can't remember why" Mom said.
"I do. I had told him if he did it
in his room I'd bust a bottom," Jens laughed. "And with good reason."
"I learned that when I went up after
it was finished and Greywolf and I had to get paint remover to clean
up the floor. But the painting of the barn is good. It never looked
like a child's work," Yong Jin said. "And how old was he? Eight
or nine as I recall," Yong Jin said, still looking at the picture
of our red barn.
Other such comments continued as the retrospective took on the appearance
of a retrospective of the life of The Family.
The Third
Gallery
The Third Gallery is located
across the hall to the right and contains what must be termed commercial
art.
Posters:
Macbeth: This poster for Independence
High School's 1993 production of Macbeth shows Macbeth and Macduff
meeting with the three witches on the heath. The figures are done
very realistically and the lettering is of the period.
A Midsummer's Night's
Dream: Done
in watercolor, the poster for Independence High School's 1994 production
of "A Midsummer's Night's Dream" captures the fairytale-like nature
of the play. The characters are shown in the famous forest practice
scene with Bottom in the donkey's head.
Campaign Poster:
Michael Andrew's
campaign for student body president at Independence came at the insistence
of a group of friends following his bold stand against prejudice.
Michael was the first student to challenge the principal's derogatory
remarks concerning a former student and spearheaded a service of
repentance and memorial for that student, Gregory Burnette who,
because of prejudice, took his own life. The poster shows Michael
jumping hurdles -- he is on the track team -- and his slogan: "No
hurdle too high for Independence with Michael running!"
Concert and Exhibition
Posters: These
have been seen all over town. Done in blues, they are caricatures
of the three leaders of the concert/recital and of myself: Paula
Wright, Eugene Willingham, Matthew Greywolf and Luke Larsen. The
lettering was chosen from a serif font discovered in a book of 18th-century
font designs.
The Recital/Concert
Program Cover: The
decision to use lettering as decoration resulted in this cover.
The background is a rich ivory and the lettering is done in an iron
oxide brown. The very fancy cursive font was found in the same book
as that used for the posters.
The Exhibition Catalog:
The cover for
the exhibition should have shown one of the major pieces from the exhibition.
This posed two interesting problems. Two of the pieces which might
have been on the cover were to be kept secret until the opening
of the exhibition. The Family, which might have been used
otherwise, did not lend itself to photography. The final decision
was to utilize the caricature of the artist already used for the
poster announcing the combined concert and exhibition.
The remainder of this collection
are caricatures done in pastels and charcoal.
Millie Willingham,
shown in her
full glory with her J. D. and branch in hand. (Author's note: For all of you who do not know,
J. D. is Jack Daniels, a Tennessee sour mash whiskey -- and if you're
old enough or a real rock and roll fan, Janice Joplin's drink --
and branch -- as in branch or creek -- is the southern expression
for water added to sour mash whiskey.)
Fr. Thomas of St. Mary's,
shown in full
vestments, but racing to the front of the church for service, late
as usual.
Gladys and Chelsea of
ICU, shown
dressing down an unknown doctor.
Mr. Ron Mitchell,
shown explaining
a calculus problem to a group of bewildered students.
Bill Lance,
ladies man and jock,
evidenced by the lipstick on his face and his basketball uniform.
Ms. Jones, shown in her principal's office,
laughing at some student prank.
Linda Lipinsky,
shown in full
battle array ready to do battle with any male who does her wrong.
Jacob McAllister,
shown extending
his hand to Michael Andrews after the student body election.
Herr Dietrich,
shown examining
the clay models for The Family bronzes.
Mr. Tom Washington, shown looking over a bronze
casting.
Again, those looking at the pictures revealed their own interests as
they looked and chatted among themselves. "Luke, I'm pleased you chose
to put my drink in a Jack Daniels' glass. Don't own one, but would
hate to think someone might get the idea I drink Kentucky bourbon,"
Millie laughed merrily.
"Luke, I almost stole that caricature
of myself before my mom saw it, but I guess she's seen worse. At
least the lipstick is on my face!" Bill grinned.
"Luke, are Mr. Washington and Herr
Dietrich coming to the exhibition?" David asked. "It would be a
pity if they didn't."
"Mr. Washington called earlier in the
week to say Herr Dietrich was ill and he didn't know whether they
would make it or not. He called again and said when he told Herr
Dietrich he thought he was too ill for the trip it was like magic
medicine. He was up and around the next day. They drove over yesterday
and spent the night so Herr Dietrich wouldn't become overly tired
and they will be spending tonight here as well. I tried to get them
to stay with us, but Mr. Washington felt that a hotel would be best.
But they will be here."
"Even if you couldn't see his face, everyone
who knows him would know you captured Fr. Tom," Linda said. "It's
the 10:59:59 sprint to the back of the church for the 11:00 service,
sure enough."
"How many times have I seen that look on
Ron Mitchell's face," Greywolf laughed. "Calculus is so simple to
him he just can't understand how students don't get it."
"I appreciate the scene you chose to
put me in," Jacob said. "I really learned a lot from the election.
Frankly, I think it is my finest moment to date -- I mean acknowledging
that the better person won. And it was the beginning of friendships
I will remember always."
Linda just looked at her caricature
and said, "What can I say? It's me all right."
And so the conversations went.
After everyone had seen all they wanted to see, I said, "Ok, if you will
all gather in gallery four, there is another unveiling."
The Fourth
Gallery
The Fourth Gallery is located
directly across the hall from the Common Room.
When everyone was present, I lifted the veil from the one piece which
was absolutely not for sale -- ever. There had been silence when Surrounded
by So Great a Cloud was unveiled; now there was the sound of
sudden intakes of breath when I unveiled the only work in the fourth
gallery.
The Fourth Gallery contains
a single painting Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf:
The medium is acrylic, but the technique is one used with oils.
Done in great detail, the painting is a full length, life-sized
portrait of Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf. He is dressed as
a Lakota warrior in moccasins and a breech cloth of white buckskin
which emphasizes his darkness. Aside from these, he wears nothing
except a headband, choker, and arm bands of red and black bead work --
the colors of a warrior. Shown in profile, his face is also painted
in a red and black pattern suitable for a warrior. In his hair,
which is loose and streaming in the wind behind him, are two eagle
feathers -- a mark of honor, and especially so for this young warrior.
Clearly visible on his cheek is a scar received in his battle to
save a life while risking his own -- the mark of a true warrior.
He is looking into the distance, seeing what others may never see.
The Artist's Comments: Once, while walking with
Matt across the meadow from the falls on the Sequoyah River, a stiff
breeze came up and caught Matt's unbound hair, causing it to stream
out behind him. In a flash, I saw him as a true Lakota warrior.
The sun highlighted the scar he had received when he gave no thought
to himself in order to save my life. I knew I wanted to capture
that picture and struggled off and on for several weeks trying to do so.
I did sketch after sketch without success. Then, one night after
I had been working for some time, the portrait you see suddenly
flashed in my mind. I grabbed my brushes and started painting furiously
before the mental image disappeared. I painted until sunrise, working
without stopping. I painted until I had captured the spirit of Matt.
When I laid down my brushes, the picture was complete as you see
it. Not another brush stroke was added.
After the initial intake of breath, silence descended upon the gallery.
People moved, as little as possible, to allow everyone to get a good
view of the painting. I was afraid to look up and see what was going
on. Finally, when I did, I saw tears streaming down Matt's face.
Greywolf had become a Lakota chief, standing proud, looking first
at the painting, then at his son, then back at the painting. Yong
Jin was teary eyed as was Gabrielle. Dad stood, looking like Beowulf,
acknowledging another great warrior. The silence was finally broken
by Millie who whispered softly, "Greater love hath no man..." Matt
moved across the room quietly and stood before me, looking at the
painting as he reached behind himself and took my hands. The silence
descended again after Millie's statement and lasted for at least
five minutes -- it seemed a year -- then everyone started talking
at once, all wanting to tell me how great the painting was. Matt knew
how to let me know and, in front of everyone, took me into his arms
and gave me a deep, passionate Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf
kiss.
"Beautiful job, Son," Dad said. "I
am proud of you beyond measure. Matt, you have a fantastic mate.
Love him for your lifetime." I could hardly believe my ears.
Almost everyone wanted to look at something
a second or third time so it was almost 1:00 when Uncle Michael
closed and locked the doors. "Everyone is invited to my place --
I guess I need to say our place, mine and John's -- for lunch."
And that was how the newest couple was introduced to the family.
I certainly hope that each
of you were able to imagine the works in this exhibition. In writing
this section I have discovered that even though I can't draw worth
diddly, describing a work of art is a poor way to display it. Maybe
one day someone will become Luke Larsen long enough to do a painting.
Who knows?
Remember, you write, then
I write. Sequoyah
Part Thirty-five B: The Concert
Matt
Uncle Michael had a buffet set up in
the new gazebo with tables along the river. Everyone was still talking about
Luke's exhibition, all excited. When lunch was over, Millie said, "Constance--Ms.
Jones--called me yesterday and told me there would be repeat performances
Monday."
"Yes, Mom, she asked about our doing
it and both the chorus and ensemble--along with Matt of course--were delighted
to do it.
"Might that not prove to be a major
conflict?" she asked. As soon as the words were out of her mouth, there were
horrified looks on five faces. "Holy shit!" Luke exclaimed. "Matt, we have
really blown it this time. Maybe it's not too late to call it off. We have
to do those interviews. Getting into Oberlin depends on them. Holy shit!
Holy damn!"
I was near tears. I suppose it was
not too late to cancel Monday, but how would that look since we had promised
Ms. Jones we would do it? Millie let us stew in our own juices for a while
longer then said, "I hope this is a lesson to all five of you. I know you
are young and tend to think long range planning is the next twenty minutes..."
"Millie, we forgot the interviews,
not because we weren't planning ahead, but because... well, we were not thinking
beyond this weekend on the one hand, but on the other, about all Luke and
I have talked about is what would happen if we didn't do well so we could
be together next year. I guess we kinda missed thinking about what would
happen between the concert and exhibition and next fall," I answered.
"Well, I hate to be the rescue lady
all the time, but I knew you had a lot on your minds this weekend and I know
how much Constance wanted the whole school to see that talent without discipline
is not enough--and I hope you have learned that from this mix up. The committee
arrived late yesterday--the whole admissions committee, the heads of the
music and arts departments as well as the professors of choral, instrumental
music and organ. Constance had called before they arrived and I explained
what had happened. They were impressed that you were willing to add two performances
and that the docents were willing to conduct tours of the exhibition for
high school students. I explained that you needed to learn a lesson about
responsibility and all agreed that you did, but you had also taken your responsibility
to your school very seriously and were willing to make other arrangements.
Accordingly, they have scheduled individual interviews this afternoon, beginning
at 3:00. If those are not completed, they will do some tomorrow afternoon
as well. I know that puts more pressure on you because of time, but that
was the best they could do since they are scheduled to leave after lunch
Monday."
"I'll stay up all night if I have to,"
Luke said. "Whatever they ask, I'll do." The other four of us were nodding
in agreement.
"You'll not have much time between
the interviews and dinner at my place, which is also a part of the interview
process as I am sure you are aware. Then, immediately after that, the concert
and exhibition are on tap. Busy day, kids, but I know you can do it."
At 3:00, we were all in Millie's living
room and, after the introductions, the whole committee met with us for half
an hour. The chair, Professor James Paul, began by saying that of course
we knew this was an unusual and unique situation. "Frankly, we would not
have done it for many people, but Mr. and Mrs. Willingham have been very
generous to Oberlin over the years and have asked nothing, absolutely nothing,
in return--until Mrs. Willingham called us about this situation. She was
so convinced that we needed you as much as you needed us that she flew us
all down here so we could actually make a decision before we leave Monday.
We had heard what you have done--including your part in what has to be an
exceptional event among high schools, your participation in the Service of
Repentance and Memorial for a former classmate. We were impressed to say
the least. All of us look forward to the recital/concert and exhibition this
evening and tomorrow evening. We have even discussed going again Monday and
may show up to see how you handle high school students. However, we want
to be convinced you should be admitted or not before we leave so we will
have a meeting Monday and let you know our decision. I know this puts a great
deal of pressure on you and you already have a great deal because of what
you have undertaken, but I fear life is often like that. What we plan to
do this afternoon, and I hope we can complete it, are individual interviews
with the people in your area and the admissions committee. So let's get started."
"Members who are not involved with
individual interviews at any time will meet with the admissions committee.
Professor Roger Stewart is head of the music department and he will begin
with Ms. Wright, then Mr. Willingham and finally with Mr. Greywolf. Professor
Taylor Granville is head of instrumental music and will meet with Mr. Willingham
first. Ms. Ruth Rote-Batten is head of choral music and will meet with Ms.
Wright, and Professor Isidore Moler, head of organ, will meet with Mr. Greywolf.
Mr. Watley, Professor Ralph Edison is head of the cooperative program with
Case-Western Reserve and will meet with you. Mr. Larsen, you will meet with
Professor Henry Pross of the art department. The admissions committee will
meet with you in the library, head of music in the parlor--good old fashioned
word and room, Millie--organ in the dining room, choral music here, and I'm
afraid art and cooperative program are exiled to the outdoors--or maybe I
should say have the privilege of being outdoors. It is a beautiful day and,
believe me, we are loving the weather after an Ohio winter. Any questions?
Ms. Wright if you will be so kind as to retire to the library. Mr. Greywolf,
if you would go with Professor Moler and Mr. Willingham go with Professor
Granville. Mr. Watley, you should go with Professor Edison and Mr. Larsen
with Professor Pross. Committee members, if you would try to complete your
interviews in thirty minutes it would be helpful. These people have a full
evening ahead of them! Are there questions? If there are none, let's get
to work."
The interviews went right on schedule.
By 5:00 all interviews were completed. When we all gathered back in the living
room, Professor Paul said, "I know you five must feel as though you have
been put through the wringer. Well, you should because you have. I hope we
have not spoiled dinner for you and I am sure we all look forward to further
conversation over dinner. And I know we are in for a treat this evening although
it is more pressure on you. I say we are looking forward to the evening,
not to be polite, but because Millie--I have known Millie as a true friend
for thirty years and I know that she doesn't mince words--says we have a
treat in store. And that means we have a treat in store, no question about
it."
"Your folks brought your clothes for
tonight while you were busy with the interviews," Millie announced, "so you
don't have to go home to change. Eugene, take the guys upstairs to your place
to change. Paula, you can use the guest room next to mine. And, guys, no
playing around."
"Mom!" Eugene shouted as the rest of
us just blushed.
When we got upstairs, all four of us
collapsed on Eugene's bed, exhausted. "Man, I hope I don't have to go through
something like that often," Larry said. There was a chorus of agreement.
"Well, I guess we better get moving. I need a shower--I need to make love
to my babe--but since that is out, I do need a shower." Again there was total
agreement.
"Guess Millie had planned for such
events. The shower is large enough for all of us," Eugene said. Soon all
four of us were in the shower and there were two couples who got in a bit
of playing around before they reluctantly left the shower, dried each other
and started getting dressed. Luke, Eugene and I had decided that the men
would wear what was almost an official school uniform--blue blazer with a
school crest on the pocket, white shirt with blue and red stripped tie and
grey slacks. I noticed that Larry was looking a bit worried and he finally
said, "Look, guys, I hope I won't embarrass you, but Mom couldn't swing an
outfit when people started getting them last fall."
"Then what's this?" Eugene asked as
he took a garment bag from his closet. There was a note on the outside and
when Larry read it, his eyes filled with tears.
When he showed it to us, I understood
why. It read, "To a wonderful son from a very proud mother".
I bound my hair loosely and Luke put
on a headband which matched his tie. "Got to get some control over this hair
or get it cut," he said.
"You better get it under control because
it will not be cut," I told him firmly.
As we walked downstairs, there was
a chorus of whistles. College professors were whistling at us! It was great
because I immediately felt a lot of tension drop from my shoulders and it
was evident the others felt the same. When Paula emerged, she was an absolute
knockout. She was wearing a pale green ankle length dress which set off her
coloring and which showed her figure well. The whistles we had received were
nothing compared to those Paula got. She was obviously made comfortable by
the response to her appearance because she did a turn around the room and
bowed.
A maid brought in a tray with glasses
and served the Oberlin people while Millie explained. "I know it's not legal
to serve alcohol to minors, but most of these kids have had wine all their
lives. And if this evening's events doesn't call for a celebration, I don't
know what would. Kids, to your health, your talent, your happiness," she
said as soon as we all had glasses. "Now let's eat."
As soon as we were seated at the table--in
Concord only Millie had a dining room and table big enough for all of us--Millie
said, "Ok, I know you haven't had time to compare notes, but how did it go?"
Professor Stewart said, "To be honest
Mrs. Willingham, I am glad we actually got to meet this crew. Had anyone
written about what they have been through in the past few months, I would
have found it hard to believe. And my understanding is that it is not over
yet for Eugene."
"It's not over for any of us, Professor,"
Luke said. "Eugene, of course, bears the brunt of the situation, but I assure
you that when anyone in the Fellowship..."
"The Fellowship?" Professor Rote-Batten
asked.
"Yes, the Fellowship of the Rings,"
Luke responded and then told her about it.
"Wouldn't it be exciting if high school
gangs were fellowships such as this group?" Professor Moler asked. "To tell
the truth, you all seem unreal. How do you explain it? Good parents and upbringing?"
"True in most cases, I guess," Eugene
said, "but definitely not in mine. I guess just as some people get on the
wrong path because of friends, we got pushed or pulled on the right one."
"Very unthinking of me, Eugene," Professor
Moler said.
"It's ok. I have a real mom and she
came just when I needed her," he responded.
Dinner conversation ranged over a number
of subjects. A whole can of worms was opened when Professor Paul mentioned
that if we were accepted at Oberlin, there would not be on-campus housing
available. "Do you think you can handle that?"
"I guess you'll just have to give us
full scholarships so we can spend the money set aside for college on housing,"
Paula laughed.
"That sounds like a great idea, James,"
Professor Stewart said. "Very reasonable Miss Wright. Very reasonable."
"Eugene and I have been looking at
a map and since some of us anticipate joint enrollment next year--Larry and
Matt at Case-Western Reserve and Luke at Cleveland Art Institute, we thought
a house in Elyra would be a great idea. In fact, since it is pretty clear
that at least those three will be in school for five years getting dual degrees,
we even thought about pooling our money for a down payment and buying a house."
"And you would live with four guys,
Miss Wright?" Professor Granville asked.
"Can you think of a place safer for
a beautiful young woman than in a house with four guys who think of her as
their sister?"
The conversation then turned to what
the five of us would be doing this summer. Paula had accepted a job in a
camp for Jewish children doing music therapy under the direction of a therapist.
Luke and I had already talked about Sewanee and Sarasota. "Larry and I haven't
given a whole lot of thought to the summer since there is a good possibility
that the trials will drag on. I will have to be here and, frankly, I need
him here to help me get through this mess. The child abuse trial probably
won't take too long, but who knows how long it or the federal child pornography
trial will last?"
"There are two trials?" Professor Moler
asked. "I thought there was only one next week." Eugene then told him about
the federal charges.
Professor Pross said. "My God, it's
a wonder you are outside a mental hospital, Eugene."
"I am lucky I guess. Three aren't."
He then had to tell about the three who were in the state hospital as a result
of McBride's abuse. When he finished, he smiled and said, "We HAD thought
about writing a soap opera, but no one would believe it."
"I hate to break this up, but unless
someone has an urgent question, I think we better let these five go and prepare
for a performance and exhibition," Millie said.
"By all means, go," Professor Paul
said. "If we have any questions after tonight, we'll talk with you tomorrow.
See you at the reception."
Paula went with Larry and Eugene and
Luke and I hopped into the Jeep, and the five of us headed to St. Mary's.
When we arrived, everyone was present and I quickly changed into my organist
cassock and surplice while Paula donned a cassock and surplice. The chorus
had chosen to wear vestments from St. Mary's rather than the usual white
shirt or blouse and black pants or skirts. Larry and Luke called Eugene and
me into the hall and gave us a good luck kiss before going upstairs. Luke
was the lucky one; he got to sit with the family. Larry, of course, would
be busy helping tape the concert/recital.
Promptly at 6:55, we all went upstairs
and took our places. The church was packed. Extra chairs had been added where
possible and there were a few people standing. Millie was in her usual place
with the bishop and his wife, and Ms. Wright and Ms. Watley were sitting
with the family. At 6:00 sharp, Eugene lifted his baton and the program started.
|
______________
An
Organ Recital
by
Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf
and a
Concert
by the
Independence High School
Brass and Percussion Ensemble
Eugene Willingham, Conductor
and
Mixed Chorus
Paula Wright, Director
_________________
|
_________________
The
Program
Overture
for Trumpets -- Henry Purcell
Te
Deum laudamus (excerpt) -- Antonio Dvorak
Nun
danket Alle Gott -- Sidfrid Karg-Elbert
Now Thank We All Our God --
arr. P. Wright and M. Greywolf
Voluntary
on the Doxology (Old 100th) -- Henry Purcell
All People That On Earth Do Dwell
-- Arr. P. Wright and M. Greywolf
Five Hymns for Organ,
Brass and Percussion Ensemble
and Mixed Chorus
Arranged
by Eugene Willingham, Paula Wright and Matthew Greywolf
All Things
Bright and Beautiful
Alexander
Smith, soloist
The Spacious
Firmament on High
Ronald Johnson,
soloist
All Creatures
of Our God and King
Jackson Simpson
and Alexander Smith, duet
Praise
to the Living God
Ronald Johnson,
Alexander Smith, Jackson Simpson,
Paula Wright,
quartet
Amazing
Grace
Paula Wright,
soloist
1
|
Rex Tremenda from Requiem --
Hector Berlioz
Prelude to Mefistofele -- Arrigo Bonito
Rigaudon
-- Andre Campra
Sheep
Shall Safely Graze -- J. S. Bach
Jesu,
Joy of Man's Desiring -- J. S. Bach
The
Family: A Tone Poem in Four Movements --
Matthew Greywolf
Dedicated
to The Family
Movement One:
Beginnings
Movement
Two: Children
Movement
Three: Separation and Conflict
Movement
Four: Reconciliation and Renewal
****************************************************************
Intermission:
There will be a fifteen minute intermission.
****************************************************************
2
|
Grand
Choeur Dialogue -- Eugene Gigout
Christ
on the Mount of Olives: Hallelujah -- Ludwig
Van Beethoven
Three African American Spirituals for Organ and
Chorus
I've Been
'Buked
Steal
Away
Twelve
Gates to the City
With
the Brass and Percussion Ensemble's Jazz Quartet
LaTishia
Gregory, piano
Symphony
No. 2 in C sharp minor, Op. 26: Preludio --
Marcel Dupre
Gigue
Fugue in G major -- J. S. Bach
Toccata,
Adagio and Fugue in C major -- J. S. Bach
From
Acht kleine preludien und fugen -- J.
S. Bach
Prelude
and Fugue in C major
Prelude
and Fugue in E minor
Prelude
and Fugue in G minor
Prelude
and Fugue in A minor
Suite
Mondale, Op. 43: Toccata -- Flor Peeters
Toccata
in E minor -- Johann Pachelbel
Sanctus
-- Charles Gounod
Paula Wright,
soloist
3
|
Te
Deum in C major -- Benjamin Britten
Maria Gomez,
soloist
Yonghon
Tongmu: Fantasia on "More" in Four Parts --
Matthew Greywolf
Innocence
Darkness
Love
Light
*******************************************************
The audience
is asked to refrain from applause until
the end
of the piece before the intermission and the
end of
the program.
********************************************************
_________________
4
|
The Brass and
Percussion Ensemble
Eugene Willingham,
trumpet and conductor
Trumpets
Chancey Edwards
DeWayne Few
Jeffery Gaines
Arthur Owen
Alexia Farmer
Richard Phifer
Horns
Jose Gomez
Scott Hacklemann
Kevin Smyth
Janice Ito
India Taylor
Trombones
Sandra Watson
Colin Foley
Glen Thompson
Amelia Rodgers
Tuba
James Elbert
Percussion
Hans Greig
Chastity Nils
LaTishia
Gregory (Ms. Gregory also plays piano for the Jazz Ensemble.)
The Mixed Chorus
Paula Wright,
soprano soloist and director
Alexander
Smith, tenor soloist and associate director
Ronald Johnson,
bass soloist and assistant director
5
|
Soprano
Rebecca Alexander
Tracey Alison
Elizabeth
Bailey Jesse Boston
Jamie Mitchell
Melissa Ross
Lynn Smith
Marilyn Scott
LaKeisha
Tate Susan Williams
Alto
Maria Gomez,
alto soloist
Kendra Jackson
Margaret Johnson
Betty Kelly
Christine Nhu
Louise Park
Maria Smith
Counter Tenor
Murray O'KellyNeil
Pilafian
Tenor
Jackson Simpson,
soloist
Patrick Murray
Kenneth Pless
Jason Thomas
Charles Vincent
Michael Williams
Timothy Yeager
Bass
Thomas Curnow
Martin Daggette
Robert Elbert
Roger Foley
Curtis Newland
Wayne Smedvig
Disclaimer: The selection of music and its performance
in St. Mary's Church does not imply endorsement of the religious
expression in the music or of St. Mary's. The music was selected
based on the desires of the performers and its merits as music.
The performance is being held in St. Mary's because of the
necessity for Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf to present
a recital on the organ at St. Mary's and through the generosity
of St. Mary's in offering this performance space.
6
|
Program Notes
How This Program
Came to Be
Matthew
Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf did an independent study in music
this, his senior year. A recital was to be the basis for his
grade. When Mr. Derrick Smith, music teacher at Independence
High School, was unable to prepare the Percussion and Brass
Ensemble and the Mixed Chorus for spring concerts, Greywolf
invited the two groups to join in his recital. Student directors
Paula Wright and Eugene Willingham, together with Greywolf,
put together the recital/concert including arranging much
of the music.
The Music
Purcell:
Overture for Trumpets -- The program opens
with fireworks from the Brass and Percussion Ensemble joining
the organ in this explosive composition.
Dvorak:
Te Deum laudamus (excerpt) -- The program
continues with an equally fiery work by Dvorak in which the
Mixed Chorus joins the ensemble and organ.
Karg-Elbert:
Nun danket Alle Gott and Now Thank We All Our God
-- Karg-Elbert's composition, based on a melody by Johann
Gruger, is performed by the organ and ensemble. Following
it, the hymn "Now Thank We All Our God", by Martin Rinckart
as translated by Catherine Winkworth, is sung by the chorus
accompanied by the organ.
Purcell:
Voluntary on the Doxology (Old 100th) and All People
Who On Earth Do Dwell -- As in the previous
work, the Purcell Voluntary is followed by the hymn on which
Purcell's composition is based, a melody from Pseaumes octante
trois de David. The hymn sung by the chorus, again accompanied
by organ alone, is a paraphrase of Psalm 100 by William Kethe.
The interlude for ensemble and organ was written by Greywolf
and arranged by him and Willingham.
7
|
Five
Hymns for Organ, Brass and Percussion Ensemble and Mixed Chorus
-- This is a work based on hymn tunes from The Hymnal
1982 of the Episcopal Church. The descant for "The Spacious
Firmament on High" was written by Wright with help from Greywolf.
The five hymns have been arranged by Willingham, Wright and
Greywolf.
All
Things Bright and Beautiful -- The hymn tune
is Royal Oak from The Dancing Master and the words are the
work of Cecil Frances Alexander.
The
Spacious Firmament on High -- Creation, the
hymn tune, is by Joseph Hayden. The words are Joseph Addison's
paraphrase of Psalm 19:1-6. the descant is by Greywolf.
All
Creatures of Our God and King -- The melody
is an adaptation of Lasst uns erfreuen by Ralph Vaughan Williams.
The words are William H. Draper's translation of words by
St. Francis of Assisi.
Praise
to the Living God -- This selection from a
Medieval Jewish liturgy was translated by Max Landsberg and
Newton M. Mann. The hymn tune, Leoni, is a Hebrew melody.
Amazing
Grace -- New Britain, the hymn tune, is from
Virginia Harmony and the words are by John Newton.
Berlioz:
Rex Trenenda from Requiem -- Composers have
frequently omitted the Day of Judgement from their Requiems,
but not Berlioz. In fact, after seeing the Michelangelo frescos,
he began imaging music which would express the "overpowering
majesty and terror of the Day of Judgement. In this music,
the composer depicts humanity's reaction when brought before
the 'King of Dreadful Majesty'." The work places great demands
upon the chorus.
Bonito:
Prologue to Mefistofele -- Many are the retellings
of Faust. Bonito not only wrote the lyrics for the opera Mefistofele
based on Faust, but also the music. The opera opens with a
prologue in which the Tempter wagers with God that he can
obtain Faust's soul. The prologue concludes with the heavenly
hosts resuming their eternal praise of God.
Campra:
Rigaudon -- A rigaudon is a lively old French
dance done in 2/4 or 4/4 time. Campra was an early eighteenth-century
composer who was well known both as Master of Music at Notre
Dame and in the French opera house. This piece could well
be used in either and, perhaps, was used in both. It is often
used today as wedding music. The chorus is given a break as
the ensemble and organ present what seems almost a dialogue
between the two.
8
|
Johann
Sebastian Bach: Sheep May Safely Graze and Jesu, Joy of Man's
Desiring -- No church organist is, it seems,
without the ability to play these two Bach pieces in his or
her sleep. Because they are so familiar and so often used,
they are not as appreciated as they might be. "They are the
two 'real' pieces I first played at St. Mary's and I often
use them when I haven't had done adequate practice for a service,"
Greywolf acknowledges. "Nonetheless, I love these two wonderful
pieces very much and would not feel that I had presented a
recital without playing them."
The Family: A Tone Poem for Organ, Chorus and Ensemble
Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf
This
original composition by Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf
is dedicated to his extended family: the Andrews, Larsen and
Greywolf families who comprise The Family of the title.
From the Composer: It is my hope and dream that
The Family will stand on its own merits. However, in the manner
of most tone poems, it tells a story. The enjoyment of the
piece is, I believe, greatly increased if that story is known.
Movement
One: Beginnings -- The family had its beginning
when three young men met when all were in the military. Two
were married -- Patanka St. Michael Greywolf had met and married
Yong Jin Kim while an Army Officer in Korea, and Jens Larsen,
a Marine officer, met and married Gabrielle Hauser while stationed
in Germany. David Andrews, a Navy officer, was unmarried when
the three met. Later he married Elizabeth McDowell, a sweetheart
from his college days. When the time came for the three to
be discharged from active duty, David had located three adjoining
farms outside Concord where the three families now live.
The
piece opens with an original composition by Greywolf called
"The River Falls". This composition ties the entire tone poem
together in recognition of the central place the falls (on
the river which flows through all three farms) plays in the
history of The Family. When first introduced, "The River Falls"
is heard in a lyrical and very romantic mode. The voices of
the chorus are used, as they often are in this work, as an
instrument, i.e., there are no words. Included in the movement
are variations on four national anthems -- United States,
Korea, Germany and Denmark -- and a Lakota chant, honoring
the heritage of members of the family. The meeting of the three
men is recalled through the use of three military anthems, sung
as a canon by the men of the chorus. It concludes with a rendition
of the children's song "Old McDonald Had a Farm" in which
members of the ensemble and chorus provide the animal sounds.
9
|
Movement
Two: Children -- Within three years of moving
to the farms, the three women gave birth to four children:
Matthew Sarang Hanun Pomul Greywolf and Luke Hans Larsen,
who were born on the same day, and Michael Andrews and Mary
Kathryn Larsen, born a few days apart two years later.
The
movement opens and closes with a version of "The River Falls"
suggestive of a children's play song. Between the opening
and closing, three lullabies are heard, sung by the women
of the chorus -- Korean, German and American. One of the moral
values held in high esteem by the families is that of tolerance.
An incident illustrating this is reproduced when half of the
men of the chorus start doing "movie Indian" war whoops and
are interrupted by the other men who do Lakota war cries.
This event took place when the three boys were young and Greywolf
stopped the "movie Indian" war whoops and taught the boys
a Lakota war cry. This same war cry played a significant part
in the revolt of students and faculty of Independence against pejorative
remarks made by the former principal. Also included in this
movement is a toccata and fugue on the round -- technically
a canon -- "Row, Row Your Boat". When the chorus and ensemble
join the organ, the audience is invited to sing along under
the direction of Ms. Wright.
Movement
Three: Pain and Conflict -- Obviously, people
have pain and conflicts -- sometimes minor, sometimes major.
Three families cannot hope to live almost as a single family
without experiencing pain -- from things as minor as childhood
scrapes and bruises to the major pain of illness and death
from cancer of Elizabeth Andrews. Likewise, conflicts happen
-- some minor as political disagreements to serious conflict
arising from misunderstandings and a clash of values.
This
movement is written in an atonal and dissonant mode -- one
section employs the twelve tone row. The choral section again
uses the human voice as an instrument. The concluding rendition
of "The River Falls" begins as a dark dirge and rapidly evolves
into utter chaos with the chorus and ensemble clashing with
each other and the organ.
Movement
Four: Reconciliation -- "The River Falls"
which opens this movement begins with a brief reiteration
of the chaotic rendition from the previous movement which
soon becomes pastoral in nature. The middle of the movement
includes Jan Struther's hymn "Lord of All Hopefulness", sung
to the Irish hymn tune "Slane." The movement concludes with
the Book of Common Prayer version of Psalm 133: Ecce, quam
bonum! -- Oh, how good and pleasant it is when brethren live
together in unity!" The hymn tune is an original composition
by Greywolf based on "The River Falls".
10
|
|
Gigout:
Grand Choeur Dialogue -- The second half of
the concert/recital opens, as the first, with a great display
by the organ and ensemble in this work.
Beethoven:
Hallelujah from Christ on the Mount of Olives --
Not to be left out, the chorus also contributes to the fireworks
of the second half with this work by Beethoven.
Three African American Spirituals for Organ and
Chorus -- Historic
black colleges, in the middle of this century, were lead by
Fisk University in bringing African American spirituals to
the attention of the American audience. Tours by choral groups
from the universities often endured great hardships because of segregation,
but continued -- often providing a significant income for
their schools. Usually the spirituals were unaccompanied,
but the first two presented in this concert are accompanied
by the organ and the third adds the Jazz Ensemble made up
of members of the Brass and Percussion Ensemble and feature
LaTishia Gregory on piano.
Dupre:
Symphony No. 2 in C sharp minor: Preludio --
No organ recital would be complete without a work by Dupre,
French Romantic organist and composer.
Bach:
Gigue Fugue in G major and Toccata, Adagio and Fugue in C
major -- Again, two extremely well-known pieces
by Bach and favorites of Greywolf.
Bach:
From Acht kleine preludien und fugen -- Bach's
"Small Preludes and Fugues" are used extensively in all manner
of settings. Greywolf has chosen four for this program.
Peeters:
A twentieth-century Canadian composer, Peeters is well-known
for his liturgical works and his work with hymn tunes often
heard in churches. Greywolf has chosen a Toccata from one
of his longer works, Suite Mondale, Op. 43.
Pachelbel:
Toccata in E minor -- Pachelbel is another
organist/composer who is a "must" in any organist's repertoire.
11
|
Gounod:
Sanctus -- The Sanctus is a part of the Mass
and is usually sung by the congregation. Composers, however,
have written very elaborate Masses which preclude congregational
participation. While this undermines the whole idea of the
congregation being an integral part of the celebration of
the Eucharist, the music certainly has a place in celebrations.
Clearly, while Gounod's Sanctus is beyond the abilities of
an average congregation, the music certainly captures the
spirit of the Sanctus as the song "angels, archangels, and
angel choirs" sing to glorify God. Ms. Wright points out it
tries the abilities of the Mixed Chorus.
Britten:
Te Deum in C major -- Benjamin Britten, an
English composer of our century, was once credited with keeping
British hopes alive during the Second World War when there
seemed to be no reason to hope. Certainly in his Te Deum the
sense of hope and strength is very present as will be felt
in this performance by the chorus, ensemble and organ.
Greywolf:
Yonghon Tongmu: Fantasia on "More" in Four Parts
-- "More," the theme from the rather grotesque film
"Mondo Cane", became a popular song in the sixties. For The
Family, it has almost become a theme song. Greywolf has written
a fantasia on the tune and incorporates in it "The River Falls"
heard in the first of his compositions "The Family." The fantasy
describes a relationship.
Innocence:
The piece opens with a very lyrical and pastoral rendition
of the song played on the organ. As the work continues, the
ensemble begins "The River Falls" in the background, providing
a backdrop for the main theme. The men of the chorus begin
singing the words to "More" to a variation of "The River Falls"
while the women sing "More" in a lullaby-like manner, suggesting
the innocence of childhood. The choral part becomes more animated
as "More" is sung in the manner of a children's play song,
complete with hand play by members of the chorus. The ensemble
grows increasingly soft until it is heard no more and the
chorus "winds down" in the manner of children exhausted by
a day of play. The organ continues, softly, playing the theme
as a lullaby until it, too, is heard no more.
12
|
Darkness:
As the first section of the piece suggests the innocence of
childhood, the second suggests death, not of innocence, but
death itself, It opens with a chaotic version of the theme
being played by the ensemble while the chorus, often using
voices without words, suggests a flickering in and out of
consciousness, going from clarity of the song to an incomprehensible
rendition of it. Meanwhile the organ modulates from the original
major key to a minor one as the song becomes a dirge. The
dirge continues as the chorus alternates between male voices
singing, without words, in a minor key and very changing tempo
-- suggesting a struggle against darkness, and female voices
singing, again without words, in a major key -- faintly at first
but growing stronger, suggesting the struggle is being won. However,
from time to time, when life seems sure, the male voices of
doom override the female voices. Finally, the organ modulates
back to a major key, supporting the women's voices as the
male voices gradually fade. The section ends with the chorus
and organ softly playing and singing the theme when the trumpets,
including the organ's state trumpets, announce the successful
end of the struggle and the chorus bursts forth in a triumphant
version of the theme.
Love:
"More" is a love song and to use it as a theme for the part
of the fantasy called "Love" would appear to be easy. Greywolf
reports that it was the hardest of the four sections to write.
"It is a love song and therefore very easy to become sentimental
and the love I wanted to describe was not sentimental, but
profound." The section opens with "The River Falls" being
played by the ensemble in a pastoral mode. When the organ
joins in, it employs flute stops and the rarely used vox humana
stop. Both organ and ensemble gradually move from the falls
theme to "More." As soon as the melody is clearly established,
the chorus joins in, singing "More" in a very pure, simple
manner. "More" goes through several transformations becoming
a waltz, played by the organ alone, a lilting version sung by the
chorus and finally a passionate version using all the available
musical resources. This section concludes with an organ and
ensemble arrangement reminiscent of the big band era as a
soprano and tenor duet sing the song to each other and then
together.
Light:
"The River Falls" theme is heard once again and for the last
time as the fourth part opens. The organ and ensemble join
to paint a picture of sunrise over the river falls. Faintly
heard above the rather quiet falls theme is the duet from
the previous section, singing "More" in a quiet, lyrical manner.
As the sun finally breaks free of the horizon, the organ,
ensemble and chorus break forth in a joyous rendition of "More."
The remainder of the movement comprises a number of versions
of the song -- some played by the organ alone, some by the
ensemble, some sung by an unaccompanied chorus and others
performed using combinations of the three. The arrangements include
a Latin one, a country-western one, a rock and roll one and several
others. The piece concludes with an "all stops" version of
the song, ending on a definite triumphant note.
13
|
Narrative Resumed:
Luke
When I saw "Yonghon Tongmu", my eyes
started filling with tears of joy. As I read the description of the piece,
I realized what Mary Kathryn meant. Matt was certainly going to earn the
painting of me! Just as I finished reading, there was a sudden explosion
of timpani and the concert/recital began. When the second piece began and
the chorus joined the ensemble and organ, it was sheer heaven. I was not
a musician, but I knew enough to know that this was an outstanding performance.
When "The Family" came to a close,
everyone in the family was teary eyed, even Dad. Twice in one day my dad
had tears in his eyes! It was hard to believe. Just as the last note faded
away, the applause was thunderous. It went on and on and on. Matt, Paula
and Eugene bowed and, as the applause continued, called the members of the
chorus and ensemble forward to take several bows. Finally Eugene held up
his hand for silence and said, "Of course, we could listen to the wonderful
sound of your applause all night, but we have a second half. But, before
your intermission, Mr. Greywolf begs a personal privilege... Matt."
"I want to take a personal privilege
at this point, but before I do, I think the chorus and ensemble should be
excused to prepare for the second half of tonight's concert." The chorus
and ensemble quickly left and Matt turned to the audience. "Thank you for
your patience and your applause. My part would not have been possible had
it not been for Millie Willingham. I need to tell you a short story. When
I was four, I escaped my mom one Sunday and, before I could be stopped, made
it to the organ where Millie was playing. Old hard-as-nails Millie could
have been expected to smack my behind and send me back to Mom but, instead,
she lifted me onto the organ bench beside her. That became my pew. When I
was almost six, Mom decided I should start piano. Usually I was an obedient
child, but this time I threw an absolute temper tantrum. I was not going
to take piano; I was going to take organ from Millie. I didn't get my bottom
tanned, which probably should have been done because I really was throwing
one tantrum after another every time piano was mentioned. Instead, Mom decided
to speak to Millie about it. Millie suggested she let me try. 'He'll change
his mind,' she said. I didn't and, for several years, played the organ without
using the pedal manual. I couldn't reach it. When I could, Millie used to
keep me in my place by showing off. After she finished her "showing-off piece"
she'd say, 'You'll never be able to play this, Matt'. Well, Millie, we're
going to see about that!" With those words, Matt went back to the organ and
cut loose on the Toccata, from Widor's Symphony Five, the piece he had played
for me several weeks before.
When he finished, the audience went
wild as Millie got up from her pew and ran and embraced him. I could hear
her all the way to where we were sitting saying, "Perfect, absolutely perfect.
Nice legs you finally grew Matthew Greywolf," and hugged him again. I glanced
over at the Oberlin committee who were seated in the pew directly behind
Millie's. I swear Professor Moler's jaw was in his lap and the others were
equally impressed. My babe had done good!
I wanted to run to Matt myself, but
thought better of it. I know had I been working as hard as he was, he would
have distracted me. He could distract me regardless of what I was doing.
I loved that man of mine!
As soon as fifteen minutes had passed,
the chorus and ensemble was again in place and, with a nod from Matt, Eugene
raised his baton and the second half began. It was great, of course, but
this time I wasn't as attentive as I might have been. I was bracing myself
for "Yonghon Tongmu." I wasn't sure what my reaction would be, but I knew
it was going to be a very emotional time for me. As the whole group started
the Gounod Sanctus, I got caught up in it and forgot about what was coming,
but as soon as it was over and the Britten started, I looked at my program
and finally dared read the notes on "Yonghon Tongmu." When I finished I started
breathing deeply as I said over and over to myself, "Don't lose it, Luke,"
because I knew I was about to have my whole life flash before my eyes.
When the piece started, it was so lighthearted
that I forgot about what was coming and relaxed. Everything was fine, then
the second part started and I found myself on an emotional roller coaster.
I mean I knew the outcome of my suicide attempt, but I was living the whole
thing over again--from my utter hopeless love of Matt to my near death experience.
Fortunately, I just turned white and started trembling rather than weeping
or screaming which I was afraid I would do. When I thought I could stand
it no longer, the third part started. It was so beautiful that I felt myself
relaxing. It was only then that I realized I could taste blood. I had bitten
my lip until blood came. Further, I saw I had clinched my fists to the point
where I had left nail prints in my hands. But all was well and I knew it
because the chorus, organ and ensemble began a simple, beautiful version
of "More."
By the time the final movement was
over, I was absolutely on an emotional high. I wanted to run and grab my
Sarang Hanun Pomul and kiss him until we both fainted, but the ensemble,
chorus and Matt weren't through because everyone in the audience was standing
and applauding. There were many shouts and whistles. After the ensemble and
chorus had stepped forward and taken several bows, Paula held up her hand
for silence and said, "I guess you want an encore." Another explosion from
the audience. As soon as they had quieted down she said, "I suspect some
of you are wondering how this group of musicians could get together and neglect
one piece of music. Well, we decided if you wanted more, we would save it
for an encore. She turned, gave the signal, and Handel's "Hallelujah" from
"Messiah" rocked the rafters. After its conclusion, the audience still begged
for more. Eugene signaled for quiet and started a very spirited rendition
of Independence's fight song followed by the more sedate alma mater. The
audience still wanted more and Paula said, "Matt, this is a gift from the
chorus and ensemble for asking us to be a part of this wonderful evening.
This is for you and the one you love above all others. The ensemble and chorus
then did the most lyrical version of "More" from "Yonghon Tongmu." I tried
not to look at Matt for fear it would reveal too much, but I couldn't keep
my eyes away and when I looked up, he was looking directly at me, a huge
Matt smile covering his face and that hot Lakota Korean, so help me, mouthed,
"I love you," then joined in singing "More".
As soon as the song was finished, Millie
came up front and presented flowers to Paula, Matt and Eugene, then turned
and said, "You have had half of this evening's treat. The second half is
the art exhibition. May I suggest you go by the tables set up on the lawn
for refreshments and to meet these young people, including Mr. Luke Larsen,
and the go into the Common Hall and enjoy his exhibition."
I made a quick dash and was able to
go against the flow of traffic to get to the front and then raced down the
stairs. Matt was in the center of the room surrounded by members of the ensemble
and chorus, but I didn't let that stop me. I finally reached him and grabbed
him and lifted him off the floor in a great bear hug. I was thinking, "Man,
I would like to do more than just hug you," when Matt leaned forward and
kissed me full on the mouth.
When he broke the kiss--it was pretty
short for a Matt kiss--he looked into my eyes as he said softly, "Luke Hans
Larsen, I love you and I don't care who knows it!" I wasn't sure I didn't
care, but when I looked around the kids were either applauding silently or
looking away--not in disapproval, I suspect, but just to say, "It's your
private world". Matt then took my hand and started racing up the steps as
he said, "Let's meet our admiring public, Mr. Larsen". When we reached the
back hall, Larry had finally completed his work and had Eugene in his arms.
Admiring public they were. Of course,
these were family and friends. Nonetheless, it was obvious they had thought
the group had done a splendid job. Mr. Smith came by where Matt, Paula, Eugene
and I were meeting people and said, "I am very pleased I didn't have anything
to do with spring concerts this year. Had I been in charge, we would have
done a passable job, but you three have set a standard I hope I can achieve
one day. You outperformed any college group I have heard and, as for high
school groups, well, they aren't even close. Fantastic job. I only wish I
could claim part credit, but it all belongs to you. Bravo!"
"Not so fast," Eugene said. "This is
the end result. Sure we put the concert together, but where would we have
been had you not taught us well from the beginning? I guess, as is true with
all teachers, people only see the end results and not the hours devoted to
getting kids to that point. Thank you, Mr. Smith. And thank you for having
confidence enough in us to allow us to try to pull this off."
"Well spoken, Eugene," Paula said.
"I couldn't agree more."
"Add my name to the list," Matt said.
"You were the one who decided I could do an independent study. Had that not
happened, tonight would not have happened."
"Matt, Eugene and I and our groups
owe you big time as well. There was no real reason you should have chosen
to share the spotlight with us. Not only did you share it, you made it shine
very bright for us and our groups. Thanks," Paula said and kissed Matt firmly
on the mouth. "I wish there was some way we could really show our appreciation."
"I guess, in a way, we owe Michael
Gray something for being an..."
"Asshole, Matt, the word is asshole,"
I helped out. Don't think Matt will ever be very good at being a foul mouth.
"I accept your thanks," Mr. Smith said,
"but I don't think Gray deserves any for being an asshole. It was just natural
for him," and laughed.
Millie walked up while we were talking
and said, "Larry, the committee will soon complete their initial tour of
the exhibition. They will take longer tomorrow, Luke. Now they would like
to meet with the engineers from PBS. Larry, do you think you could ask them
if they would be willing to do so? I know it is getting late and they would
like to get back to Lexington, but it would be very helpful to the committee
if they could spare the time."
"Sure, I'll ask, but I don't know if
they are willing to stay any later or not."
Larry
When Paula said she and Eugene owed
Matt and would like a way to show their appreciation, I saw a gleam come
into Eugene's eye. I knew my man well enough to know he was hatching up some
plot, but I didn't have time to talk with him. I had to go inside to find
the engineers who were preparing to tape the exhibition. They wanted to get
some work done tonight so I wasn't sure how they would respond to another
request. "Mr. Steinbeck, Mr. Greentree, there is a committee here interviewing
five of us for possible admission to Oberlin College in Ohio. If I am accepted,
I will also do joint enrollment in Case-Western Reserve in audio-video engineering.
They have asked to meet with you tonight if you can spare the time. I know
it's late and you want to get home but if you..."
"We'd be happy to Larry. The only problem
is filming the exhibition. Actually, we're not making alot of progress because
of the people inside and we don't have anyone to do the voice over. Poor
planning on our part. I guess we thought we could just grab Luke, but I see
that's not possible."
"I'll talk with him and see if we can't
make arrangements for filming tomorrow afternoon before the performance and
before the exhibition is open to the public. Would that be helpful?"
"It would be great. We'll plan on doing
that and if we can't, we'll make other arrangements if this Oberlin thing
is important to you."
"It's damned important. Thanks a million."
I found Millie and told her what we
had discussed. "I'll talk with Fr. Tom and make arrangements for filming
about 4:00. That should give you plenty of time before the concert begins.
I'll also check with Luke. I'm sure he'll have no problem with helping out.
You go and get the engineers and take them to the conference room."
When the three of us reached the conference
room, I introduced the engineers--Mr. Ralph Steinbeck and Mr. Henry Greentree--and
the committee members and turned to go. "Larry, if you are not busy, I think
we'd like to have you sit in on this interview," Professor Paul said. He
then explained why they were in Concord and that while the others were able
to demonstrate their talent and skills, I had not been able to do so. "I
know that before it is broadcast, the tapes will be edited by professionals
and we can't really learn much about Larry through them. We thought if we
could talk with you, we'd get a clearer picture of Larry's talents and how
you see him doing in the field. First off, just how much input has Larry
had in the whole process?"
"Before we ever came to Concord, Larry
had done an evaluation of St. Mary's from the standpoint of the placement
of cameras and mikes. The first we knew about what we might be doing came
from a fax of his layout," Mr. Greentree said.
"And when you got here, what did you
find?" Professor Pross asked.
"To be honest, we did not find what
we expected. We expected to see little correlation between the plan and reality.
What we found was that Larry had done a job which would been accepted as
that of a professional. He was realistic as well. Soon after we were introduced
he said, 'Now we'll see the difference between what I thought was and reality.'
That's a great insight. Most young engineers spend hours trying to make reality
fit a plan. Larry was very clear that the plan could be changed, the reality
could not."
"So reality and plan were not the same?"
Professor Moler asked.
"Are they ever?" Mr. Steinbeck responded.
"However, Larry's plan was closer to reality than many I, and I suspect,
Henry--Mr. Greentree--have made. The first day we were here we did meter
readings using some very sophisticated equipment which Larry did not have
available. But his ears and eyes served him well. Very few changes were made
from the original plans."
"And many of those, I would like to
point out, were the result of our having better equipment than Larry had
seen in the school TV studio. You can't plan to use something you don't have.
For example, most of the cameras we used were remote controlled. Larry is
used to using stationary cameras or holding one on his shoulder. But, within
minutes of having the controls explained, he was handling them as if he had
used them for years," Mr. Greentree said.
"We also, unknown to Larry, went to
school to see some of his work with the very limited equipment they have.
If you want to see pure Larry work, get a copy of the campaign spots he made
for the race for student body president. No-one had anything to do with those
tapes except Larry."
"Actually gentlemen, we have seen those
tapes. Mrs. Willingham sent copies, along with Larry's application as she
did tapes of the music and photographs of Luke's art."
I was waiting, I guess, for the bad
news because these two fellows were painting me as a professional and I knew
I was not. And the campaign tapes were really rush jobs. Anyone could see
that.
"There is something I want to add which,
in one way, has nothing to do with his talent and skills and potential for
success, although I do want you to know that those are there, but so far
as I am concerned, something else is more important and I think you should
consider it as well," Mr. Greentree said.
I knew it. Here comes the bad news.
"There are a lot of rotten things which
go on in our business from child porn to doctored stories to false advertising.
We're not proud of that, but it's there. We haven't known Larry long, but
when you work and sweat with someone, you learn about them quickly. Ladies
and Gentlemen, Larry Watley is one of the finest young men I have met in
a long time. I only hope my son grows up to be as honest, hard working, disciplined
and dedicated to his calling--that's what it is for you, Larry--as Larry
Watley."
"I couldn't agree more, Henry," Mr.
Steinbeck said. "Frankly, I have no question about Larry being a great addition
to Oberlin. If I didn't know Oberlin's reputation, I might want to question
you as to whether your school was good enough for him and that is said only
half joking," he said and laughed.
"Gentlemen, we appreciate your taking
this time with us. And," Professor Paul laughed, "I hope it doesn't give
Larry a big head, but I think we would tell you that we have only known him
for a few hours and we see nothing which would make us question your evaluation
of him. You will be back tomorrow?"
"Yes, we were going to film the exhibition
tonight, but this interview was more important so we are making arrangements
to film it tomorrow afternoon."
"Again, thank you. And if your sons
grow up the way you hope, give Oberlin a call. We always need good people
who are good students and they don't always come together as in this crew
we have met here."
We shook hands all around and left
the conference room. "Larry, we meant every word we said in there," Mr. Greentree
said. "We would have said no less had you not been present. It's a real pleasure
working with you and with the others. See you at four and you'll have someone
to do the voice over as we film?"
"Sure. In fact, I'll have Luke and
a couple others. That way someone can act as docent and Luke can make any
comments he wants to make."
"Great, see you at four," Mr. Steinbeck
said.
After they left, I went to the exhibition
where I found the docents still busy and Luke standing to one side talking
with a group of people. Millie found me and said, "Larry, I have asked Luke's
and Matt's parents so Matt and Luke can stay with you and Eugene tonight--I
told your mom you would be staying over. You four have had a long day and
if Luke and Matt are already in town, they can sleep a few minutes later
in the morning. I expect the four of you to get some sleep and not play around
all night."
"Millie, I think we are all too beat
to play around, but I sure hope there's time for a massage. I know Matt could
use one after his time at the organ and I suspect Eugene could as well."
"Sounds like a good idea for all four.
Hot tub, massage and then to bed, Ok?" I nodded.
When I went looking for the others,
I saw Paula and Eugene talking to Fr. Tom. Before I went over to where they
were, Matt and Luke came up and Luke said, "Understand we're staying over".
"Yea, but Millie has laid down the
law--hot tub, massage and to bed. No playing around."
I don't think she needs to worry about
that on my part," Matt said.
"Ditto," Luke added. "I didn't get
the workout Matt, Eugene and Paula did, but just dealing with all these people
has really taken the starch out of me."
It was midnight before we got to leave
for Eugene's. When we reached his house, Millie was already there and handed
Matt a travel bag. "Luke, Matt, clean underwear, socks and shirt inside along
with something else. Yong Jin said it was from Margaret for the four of you."
When we got upstairs, Matt opened the
bag. Inside were the clothes along with two bottles of massage oil. "Hey,
Larry and I have made a discovery about warm oil. Be back in a minute," Eugene
said as he took the two bottles and ran downstairs.
The three of us sat on Eugene's bed
and talked about the evening. I told Luke about the taping tomorrow and the
interview the committee had with the engineers. Just as Eugene returned with
the oil, I said,"This would have been a hell of a weekend with the concert/recital
and exhibition OR the interviews, but both? Damn!"
"You are forgetting something, lover
boy, there is also the bishop tomorrow morning. I'm coming to think of this
as the survival of the fittest weekend!," Eugene said.
"Damn shooting," Luke agreed. "But
man, we are surviving. Hot tub!" Ordinarily we would have left clothes from
the bed to the tub, but we had to take the time to hang up blazers and pants.
The rest got tossed in a pile. After a quick shower, all four of us hit the
hot tub. A nanosecond later Matt and Luke and Eugene and I were entwined
in our lover's arms. I mean, is there any real benefit to just soaking in
a hot tub when you can be holding your love, kissing the reason you are glad
to be alive? I think not.
Luke
After fifteen minutes or so in the
hot tub, I looked at Larry and smiled. Our lovers were almost asleep. After
all, not only had they the stress of the performance, but both had done a
hard day's work physically. I lifted Matt out of the tub, dried him and,
when he started to dry me, he was so sleepy I had to finish the job. I noticed
Larry was having the same problem with Eugene. Larry and I picked up our
lovers and took them to the bed which Eugene had covered with two beach towels.
On the night stands on either side of the bed were glass cylinders of water
holding the oil. "Eugene suggested using a water bath to keep the oil warm,"
Larry said. "It works like magic." He took a bottle of oil and began massaging
Eugene's shoulders and back as I did the same for Matt. We turned them over
and did their front and before we were through, both were sound asleep. "My
babe is one tired man," Larry observed.
"Same here. I sure don't want to wake
them. Maybe I can get the towel out from under Matt without doing that."
I did, as did Larry.
"I think we could roll them on the
floor and they would still be asleep," he laughed. "I must confess, I am
pretty bushed myself. Good night, Luke," he said then he gently kissed his
sleeping lover.
Millie let us sleep until 9:00 so showering,
shaving and getting dressed was done without any love making beyond a good
morning kiss. When we were dressed, the four of us went downstairs where
Millie was waiting breakfast for us. "Hope you guys got some rest and didn't
play around all night."
I laughed and told her just how little
playing around was done. "I doubt that Matt or Eugene remember anything except
going upstairs."
"That's about it," Matt said. "I do
remember dreaming about a wonderful massage--at least, I think I was dreaming."
"No dream, lover," I replied.
When we got to St. Mary's, Fr. Tom
said the bishop wanted to talk to Matt. Matt went to the office and Fr. Tom,
unlike most Sundays, was vested and ready to start on time. When I got to
the back of the church, I noticed the committee was again sitting behind
Millie's pew. I hadn't expected them to be present. I almost fainted when
I looked to where the family was sitting because Mom and Dad were sitting
with them. I guess they wanted to see their two kids received into the Episcopal
Church, but it surprised me. As I walked toward my pew, I saw Fr. Tom walk
down the side aisle toward the front when he should be going to the back
for the processional. I looked again and saw that Eugene wasn't with Millie.
I had a feeling something strange was going on here.
Fr. Tom signaled Matt before he could
start the prelude and walked to the chancel steps. "Last night, the Independence
High School Mixed Chorus and Brass and Percussion Ensemble presented a concert
here. Our organist, Matt Greywolf had invited them to do so when they were
not going to be able to have a spring concert at school. Matt was obligated
to do a recital, but, in the words of Mr. Eugene Willingham and Ms. Paula
Wright, he asked them to share his spotlight. The two groups asked me about
a way they wanted to show their appreciation to Matt--and to St. Mary's for
providing a performance space. I thought it was an excellent idea. Therefore,
I asked the bishop to get Matt out of the picture so we could get a surprise
ready for him. Matt, if you will discard the service bulletin you have and
take this one, you will see the gift of appreciation your fellow musicians
have for you. Of course, you have to work at it as well. The congregation
will find the correct bulletin in the pockets in the pews. We couldn't give
them to you early because this is a surprise. Matt, you'll need the music
folder behind the music you planned to play."
I reached forward and took the "correct"
bulletin and thought, "Never a better surprise or gift". The music for the
service had been selected from the concert program! When I looked up, the
ensemble was gathering in the chancel. Matt was teary eyed, but finally managed
to get control of himself and start the prelude. It was the Dvorak "Te Deum."
As soon as it started, the chorus processed into the church.
But the surprises were not over. When
it came time for confirmation and reception, the bishop called for the candidates
and presenters. Millie and Larry walked forward to be joined by Eugene; Linda
and Bill were together, Uncle Michael was the presenter for Margaret, Michael
and David. Yong Jin was asked to present Mary Kathryn since she was her godmother
and I asked Matt to present me. We, and a few others not part of the Family
or Fellowship, were standing at the altar rail when I caught a glimpse of
Greywolf out of the corner of my eye. I wasn't sure why he was present until
I turned around and man, what a surprise. Mom and Dad were standing with
him!
I don't remember a great deal about
the ceremony I was so thunderstruck. But Mom and Dad were there being received
into the Episcopal Church! Matt had seen our van that day. Mom and Dad had
been meeting daily with Fr. Tom and almost got caught. After a long, hard
struggle, Dad had finally decided he couldn't live with being a part of a
church which condemned his son. About that time, Mary Kathryn saw what was
going on and her mouth fell open. As we turned to return to our pew, I grabbed
Dad and hugged him tightly. Then I lost it. I started crying like a baby
hugging my dad. Then he came unglued. Well, if people didn't like crying
Larsen men, that was their problem!
After the reception--this time it was
Mary Kathryn who had a good cry while hugging Mom and Dad--we all went to
Uncle Michael's for dinner. He had invited the Oberlin committee and they
came. By this time I think they were beginning to think they were family!
It seems he was in on the plot Eugene and Paula had hatched up last night
and I don't know how he managed it, but he invited the members of the chorus
and ensemble along with the bishop and his wife and the Oberlin committee.
There were tons of people and tons of food.
Professor Rote-Batten ended up sitting
with Luke, Eugene, Larry, Paula, Michael and Mary Kathryn and me in the gazebo.
After she got relationships straightened out , she said, "I couldn't help
but notice you two were overcome emotionally this morning. If it isn't too
personal, what was involved that I didn't know about?"
"Well, it's a long story. Are you sure
you want to hear it?"
"All of it. We're here to learn about
five people, not check grades or references. We've done that."
Four of us looked at each other and
Luke finally said, "You do know we're gay, don't you?"
"As a matter of fact, we do, but that
has nothing to do with whether or not you'll be accepted into Oberlin."
"Well, it has everything to do with
why Mary Kathryn and I broke down this morning. Just for the record, Paula
will be safe with us, not only because we do count her as a sister and would
beat the shi... Take care of anyone who tries to do her wrong, but she will
be living with two couples who have pledged they are together 'til death
do us part'. But the story..." Luke and I told the whole story of how we
came together and how Dad had reacted when he learned I was gay. "He has
struggled bravely..."
"Now the comment about Beowulf really
takes on depth," the professor said. "And the painting of Matt... and let
me guess. Matt wouldn't, by any chance, have given you a strange name, would
he?"
"Korean--at least I think it is," Matt
said. "Yonghon Tongmu, Soulmate."
"Holy shi..."
"Professor, you must know Michael.
You almost said his favorite curse words!" Mary Kathryn laughed.
"You two guys told the world of your
love for each other and few are the wiser," Professor Rote-Batten laughed.
"You are a pair! And, Luke and Mary Kathryn, I can see why you broke down
and, I suppose, your parents made this switch without your knowing about
it?"
"A complete surprise to all of us,"
Michael said.
"Back to this 'til death do us part'
bit. Do you really mean that?"
"Yea, like being married. Of course,
not legally. And while we haven't had it yet, Luke and I will have a commitment
ceremony, probably before we leave for Oberlin. We think we will know when
the right time comes," Matt answered.
"Eugene and I really haven't talked
about a public ceremony--and certainly wouldn't until this mess with the
upcoming trials is over. But I think you could say our commitment is as close
to being married as a gay couple can have. It's total "til death do us part."
"All of you are awfully young to be
talking about "til death do us part," Professor Rote-Batten said. "And you
know, you're going into art and music--well, I guess you might be safer in
engineering Mr. Watley, not sure--where, for whatever reason, there are going
to be many gay men and some are going to be very handsome and very seductive.
You are very handsome, all four of you, and very inexperienced. The temptation
will be great," Professor Rote-Batten observed.
"And I wouldn't be honest if I said
that didn't frighten me," Matt said. "I don't mean next year. I'll have Luke
then and, believe me, when he's around there is no such thing as a handsome
man compared to him. I am worried about our being separated this summer."
I hadn't intended to say that, but it just sorta slipped out.
"Let's be honest. Gay men do not have
a corner on talent and creativity, but there does seem to be something which
draws them into the arts. I would be surprised if both of you were not tempted
to break your promises this summer. But I assure you, it won't be the last
time you will be tempted. Temptation is just part of life," she observed.
"But, it's amazing the power love has."
"I certainly hope so. Matt and I have
talked a lot about what would happen if one or the other were unfaithful."
"So have we," Eugene said.
"Well, don't stop talking. If you keep
talking to each other and keep loving each other, you can overcome just about
anything. And, as I said, your being gay won't keep you out of Oberlin and
while I would like the others on the committee to know of your devotion to
each other, I don't think I will tell them. This has been a kind of sacred
conversation for me and I'd like to be selfish and treasure it by myself.
By the way, I have just had a sudden thought which might be of help with
housing. I'll check it out because I'm not sure about it, but I'll be in
touch as soon as I get back. Also, I may be wrong, but from some of the looks
and actions I have observed, I gather that there is another couple among
us. Right?"
"Yea, we're the straight couple in
the family," Michael said. "Mary Kathryn and I are responsible for grandchildren,
but no one will let us get started on the job." Mary Kathryn, Wild Woman,
demonstrated her skill as she smacked Michael a good one.
By the time lunch was over, it was
time to get to the filming. Larry asked Mary Kathryn and Michael to go with
him to help with the voice over for the film.
The evening's concert/recital went
as well as did the night before--maybe even better. After the last encore,
Millie came forward to make the presentation of flowers and then said, "I
would like for you all to share in a joyous moment for Independence High
School and the five seniors responsible for tonight's concert and the exhibition.
I would like to introduce to you Professor James Paul, chairman of the Oberlin
College Admissions Committee. Dr. Paul."
"Thank you Mrs. Willingham. At the
request of Mrs. Willingham, and I might add her expense, the entire admissions
committee from Oberlin, along with department chairs and others, came to
Concord to interview and observe Miss Paula Wright, Messrs. Luke Larsen,
Eugene Willingham, Larry Watley and Matthew Greywolf. We did this because
of events which occurred after Oberlin's admissions were closed, but Mrs.
Willingham convinced us that those five young people had much to offer Oberlin
as well as Oberlin having much to offer them. We went over all their official
records before coming, we read their application essays, talked with their
principal, counselor, and several teachers. Since we have arrived, we have
interviewed them as well as a number of people who know them. We have surely
observed their talent, their discipline and potential. I could go on, but
I will not. We promised the five we would make a decision about their admission
before we left at noon tomorrow. I think we all expected it to be a decision
we would have to make at the last minute, but it has not turned out that
way. After a conversation with the college president this afternoon, I am
happy to announce that all five have been accepted into Oberlin and, Miss
Wright, as you so correctly pointed out, we needed to give you full scholarships.
Well, you have them."
There were high fives throughout the
chorus and ensemble, applause and whistles from the audience. Larry was fighting
his way to the front as was I. Soon there was a five way hug going on as
the five of us hugged each other.
It took a long time for us to get out
of the church and to the reception as we were swarmed by people. I think
we were a bit numbed from all the surprises of the day, but not enough for
us to miss the fact that Matt and I and Eugene and Larry would be together
next year.
Matt and I got home before midnight
and were still high from the day's excitement. Thoughtful Larry had brought
one of the bottles of the massage oil to St. Mary's and told us he had stashed
it in the Jeep. Matt took it downstairs and found a glass large enough to
hold it and water and heated it in the microwave. Tonight, he gave me a massage
first and I didn't fall asleep. How could I when he started massaging my
cheeks and rubbing my rosebud. When he did my front, he--as usual--avoided
my manhood until last, then brought me to a roaring climax, literally. I
am sure that Yong Jin and Greywolf heard my shout as I exploded, spraying
me and my Dark Angel with man's seed. Matt, on the other hand, groaned softly
until his climax hit him and then he took a deep breath and held it. His
climax past, he grabbed me and started covering my body with kisses. Soon
we both were kissing and licking each other, sucking nipples and kissing
some more. Matt lay atop my body as we continued our hot making out. Both
of us were surprised when a second climax rocked our bodies at the same time.
We lay holding each other in the afterglow of our love making until he said,
"Yonghon Tongmu, you are my life and my world but, damn, we are a mess!"
Laughing, he hopped out of bed, scooped me into his arms and carried me to
the shower. When we had cleaned up, we went back to his bed, and I inhaled
deeply the fragrance of my Matt and cradled in his arms, went to sleep and
dreamed of Oberlin and our life together there.
Part Thirty-six
Matt
After the excitement of Sunday and
the terrific love-making of Sunday night, I expected to find it hard to wake
up Monday morning. I didn't because I was awakened when I felt Luke's lips
against mine and his whisper, "Dark Angel, I love you more every day I live".
I returned his kiss passionately and whispered back, "Bright Angel, you are
the reason I live every day!" Reluctantly, we got out of bed and crossed
the hall to brush our teeth and take a piss--not in that order--before we
pulled on sweats for the morning run. We climbed down the trellis and found
Michael and Mary Kathryn waiting for us. "Luke, Matt, we need to talk as
well as run this morning. I mean serious talk."
"Ok, we'll run and jog back so we can
talk," Luke responded. "Now let's run. I feel so alive!" We started running
and Luke started shouting, greeting the morning, and the three of us joined
him. After we had run about three miles, Luke said, "Ok, let's jog and talk".
"Luke, Michael and I had a long talk
last night about you and Matt. I think anyone looking at your painting of
Matt and how it was displayed would realize that it was more than a painting
done of a brother by a brother. Matt, most of the kids who saw you kiss Luke
accepted--at least tolerated--what was clearly not an expression of brotherly
love. To be honest, you two outted yourselves yesterday almost as clearly
as if you had made an announcement. As I said, most kids I heard mention
it were at least tolerant, but I know some are not," Mary Kathryn said. "And
we all know the least tolerant ones weren't there yesterday. Today with this
all-school field trip the good, the bad and the impossible will know all
about it. I'm sure the kiss will be the topic of the morning gossip. Then,
when they see the exhibition, they will see the painting."
"Since we are going directly to St.
Mary's, you won't have to worry about the reaction when you get to school,
but before the day is over, everyone in school will be talking--one way or
the other. I don't know what the reaction will be. I know that Independence
has made a lot of progress in the past few weeks, but a lifetime of homophobia
doesn't get washed away in days. Be warned and be careful," Michael added.
"I hadn't given thought to that," I
admitted. "I guess we should have."
"Matt, what's done is done and if we
outted ourselves, I guess we wanted to, whether we were conscious of it or
not. We have said before that our love will sustain us through anything.
I hope we are right because I think we are facing a real test of our love
here. And I hope that you two have overstated the case. If not, we'll just
have to deal with it."
"Remember, we are here for you," Michael
said as he kissed Mary Kathryn and turned to go up his walk.
We all fell silent, lost in our own
thoughts as we jogged the rest of the way. When we reached my place, Luke
kissed me and said, "Matt, I think we might have breakfast with our families
this morning". I agreed and watched as he and Mary Kathryn jogged home.
When I had showered and dressed, I
went downstairs to find Mom and Dad waiting breakfast for me. "Matt," Dad
said,"You don't know how proud you have made your mom and me. Your recital
was splendid and the original compositions were outstanding. Your acceptance
to Oberlin not only means a great deal to you and Luke, but also to us since
it is a recognition of your talent and hard work. We're having dinner here
tonight so we can all boast and celebrate." Then there was a long pause.
"But there is something else." Another long pause. "Now please don't take
what we have to say as criticism."
"Yes, please don't," Mom added.
"You know that we accept and love you
dearly and that we are happy that you have the love of Luke. Regardless of
what we might have preferred, we are overjoyed that you have found the happiness
you have with the man you love so deeply. However..."
I braced myself for... I didn't know
what.
"However, I hope you realize that this
weekend has changed things dramatically. Luke's painting of you, especially
displayed as it is, caught the attention of a number of people. It didn't
take a rocket scientist to see that it was not just a painting, but the painting
of someone loved deeply and, to be blunt, not as a brother. Then your 'Fantasia'
could hardly have made your feeling for Luke clearer if you had called it
'Luke Larsen'. Again, don't get me wrong. I am not condemning or even questioning
what the two of you did. Both works were statements of great love and I can
find no fault with that. Also, I understand that when Luke came downstairs
to congratulate you, you kissed him in a most unbrotherly fashion..." Dad
paused.
I blushed then hung my head. "It's
true, Dad, Mom. I couldn't contain myself I was so happy and excited. And,
yes, I gave him a full, tongue-in-the-mouth kiss. I'm sorry."
"Are you?" Mom asked. "I really doubt
that, Matt. And I don't expect you to be."
"You're right, Mom, I'm not sorry.
I am sorry and maybe worried about what that impulsive action may bring about.
Michael and Mary Kathryn talked to us about it this morning."
"Well, I think it is safe to say you
two are about as out as you will ever be. Maybe that is best, I don't know.
But I do know you are probably facing some rough times ahead. Your mom and
I wanted to be sure you realized what had happened and to know that we are
here to offer any support we can. And to make sure you understand were we
stand, I want to say again, your mom and I are very, very proud of you and
Luke. And we are also pleased you have found so great a love. We do know
that great loves can withstand a lot, right, Yong Jin?"
"Very right, Greywolf," Mom replied
as she crossed the kitchen and kissed my dad then the two of them embraced
me.
After breakfast, I went to pick up
Luke. As he got in the Jeep--since Michael wasn't going to the actual school
building, he decided the rules against sophomores having cars didn't apply
and he picked up Mary Kathryn--he said his family had a discussion and as
he talked about it, I told him it was the same discussion I had with Mom
and Dad. Nothing more was said about how we had--unconsciously--outted ourselves.
"Matt, are you excited about today?"
Luke asked as we approached St. Mary's.
"I didn't think I would be. I thought
by today the performance would be old hat, but I'm getting butterflies just
as I did Saturday and Sunday."
"So am I."
When we reached St. Mary's, all the
crew was already there. The ensemble and chorus were in the church, warming
up, and the docents were waiting to begin. Soon the buses pulled in with
the juniors and seniors for the exhibition. Luke had walked into the back
hall where I was vesting a short time before and, just before I was ready
to go to the organ, took me into his arms for a magnificent Luke kiss. I
didn't want to let him go. My mouth and then my whole being was filled with
the taste of Luke. When we finally broke our kiss, I thought I saw a shadow
at the other end of the hall, but decided this morning's talk had gotten
to me more than I thought.
Leaving Luke, I went to the organ prepared
to start the third performance of the recital/concert. Eugene, Paula and
I had decided it was very long for school kids and cut out a few things,
but the basic concert and recital remained intact.
Luke
As soon as I had given Matt a good
luck kiss, I went back to the exhibition. Perhaps I was being overly sensitive,
but I thought the crew were being especially attentive when I arrived. "Luke,
Ms. Jones suddenly realized that two classes are too much to try to see the
exhibition at the same time so she has decided the juniors will go first
and then seniors. If you'll look out in the church playground you'll see
just how mature the seniors are." I walked over to the window and saw seniors
in high school being kids again--sliding, swinging and playing like little
kids.
It seemed the juniors were either totally
disinterested or full of questions. It took a while to get them all through
the exhibition. I hung around, answering questions when asked, but mostly
just observing. I was especially observant when a group went into the gallery
with Matt's picture. There were a lot of questions, but nothing to indicate
that anyone saw the painting as anything more than a painting. I must confess
I was relieved.
When the juniors had finished going
through the exhibition, the seniors came in--and the juniors hit the playground.
The seniors were generally more interested than the juniors. Four guys--Independence's
"skin heads" seemed to take special interest in the exhibition. Michael was
their docent and they kept asking questions of him and me as well.
It was nearing time for lunch when
all the seniors had gone outside except the Fellowship and the junior basketball
players who were laughing and talking with Bill. Jacob and Mary Kathryn were
just outside the gallery door when the four with Michael entered where Matt's
picture hung. As soon as they were inside, Shawn McKay whipped out a knife
and lunged toward the painting of Matt shouting, "Why are we looking at a
picture of a shit packing, cock-sucking faggot?" as he slashed the painting.
The three with him shouted, "Cut the queer's picture again, Shawn. Get the
cock sucker good." I felt as though a knife had gone through my heart. But
the worse was yet to come. As Michael rushed toward him, Shawn turned, knife
still in hand, and slashed Michael. As Michael fell to the floor, Mary Kathryn
screamed, "Bill and you basketballs players, get in here now! Someone call
911!" Bill rushed into the room as Shawn lunged toward me. He quickly took
Shawn down and wrestled the knife from him.
Jacob and the basketball players quickly
took care of the other three as Mary Kathryn and I rushed to Michael. He
was covered with blood and I could see he had been cut badly. "Get Mr. Allan
and Greywolf," I said as I ripped off my shirt and tried to stop the bleeding.
It was soon obvious that the cut had started just below Michael's right eye,
crossed his cheek, then his chest to just below his rib cage and then turned
in the opposite direction, slashing open his abdomen. Mr. Allan and Greywolf
came and started administering first aid as best they could. Michael was
losing a tremendous amount of blood and nothing they did seemed to stop it.
Ms. Jones appeared at the door and
said, "The EMS is on the way. It's only three or four minutes to the hospital.
I have also called the police. The basketball guys and Bill have the four
involved well in hand. I am sending everyone else into the church." Before
she had finished speaking, I heard the sirens of the EMS team.
Unfortunately, David was on duty and
came with the team. I met them at the door and said, "David, Michael's been
hurt. I think you better let your team mates handle this." He, of course,
ignored me and rushed into the room. Two team members were working on Michael
and David, being the professional he was, joined right in, nonetheless, tears
were streaming down his face.
While the other team members worked
on Michael, David got on his radio and called the hospital telling them the
situation and that they needed to have a surgeon standing by ready to operate.
"Michael, I am sure, has a punctured bowel and has lost and is losing a great
deal of blood. Call Dr. Bailey--Dr. Andrews and tell her. We are ready to
transport. We'll need someone to work on his face as well. It is cut badly.
His blood type is AB positive. You'll probably have to find someone who can
donate since I doubt that there is enough available."
When the EMS team left with Michael,
Ms. Jones had returned and said, "Greywolf, you are not capable of driving
a bus load of kids. I have called for drivers to take everyone back to school.
When we get there, I will send them home. You need to stay here. I haven't
told those in the church what happened, but when I do, you and Yong Jin will
need to be with Matt."
"We'll need to be with the whole Fellowship,"
Greywolf replied quietly. "We will take care of them."
I walked down the hall and walked up
behind Matt who was still sitting on the organ bench. As soon as I saw him,
I couldn't hold it any longer. I burst into great sobs and clung to him.
"Matt, Michael has been hurt. He's been hurt really bad." I had forgotten
about Mary Kathryn until she put her arms around me and started crying. I
quickly told Matt what had happened.
"Why Michael? Why Michael?" Matt kept
asking. "Michael has done nothing. We are the guilty ones. Why Michael?"
The three of us held each other as
Ms. Jones walked to the front of the packed and overcrowded church.
"Students, Independence has had another
tragedy resulting from intolerance and hatred. Shawn McKay made some accusations
about Matt Greywolf and then slashed a magnificent painting of him done by
Luke Larsen..."
"One queer's painting of another queer,"
someone shouted from among the packed students.
There was a brief disturbance and Tanishia
Berry was walking up the packed center aisle, dragging a girl by the hair
of her head while twisting her arm behind her back. "Ms. Jones, you had better
take this bitch before I take care of her!" she said as she shoved a girl
down in front of Ms. Jones.
"You stay right there or I'll turn
my back and let Tanishia have a go at you," Ms. Jones said. "Not only did
Shawn slash the painting, but he also slashed Michael Andrews' face, chest
and abdomen. While there is no official word at this time, Mr. Andrews, who
was with the EMS team, thought it was very serious, very serious indeed.
He told me there is always hope, but that he felt Michael might well die
from his wounds. Blood is critical because Michael had lost a great deal
before the EMS team got here and was still losing blood when they left for
the hospital with him. Michael has a rather rare blood type and there probably
is not enough at the hospital. If you are eighteen and are willing to give
blood, stay behind and you will be taken to the hospital so your blood can
be typed and drawn. If you're not eighteen, but would like to donate, you'll
have to have parental permission. You can call and have your parents meet
you at the hospital. If you are not going to the hospital to give blood,
will you please leave the church quietly and board the buses. You will be
taken back to school and then home. And keep Michael in your thoughts." She
then looked down at the girl still on the floor under Tanishia's watchful
eye and said, "Your are suspended until there can be a hearing. I suggest
you see if you can use the phone here and get someone to take you home. Your
parents will be in my office tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp."
"I might have known you'd take up for
faggots!" she shouted and, before Ms. Jones could stop her, Tanishia gave
her a good smack to the mouth. In response the girl shouted, "Even you, you
fucking nigger, you are taking up for faggots!" she shouted.
"Forget the phone and get out of my
sight!" Ms. Jones said.
As the students started leaving the
church, I noticed several were kneeling before they finally got up. About
fifty students were still in the church when Ms. Jones asked, "Are you waiting
to go to give blood?" All nodded. "I have a bus waiting to take you to the
hospital." Soon only the Fellowship was left and Ms. Jones came back to make
sure we were ok.
We told her we would go to the hospital
as well, "But first we need to get ourselves together," Matt said. "I miss
Michael. This is the kind of thing he could handle." Before we left, all
of us, except Paula, knelt for a time. She stood straight, her hands uplifted.
As we got up she said, "Think a Jewish prayer might help as well as a Christian
one and I pray standing". Mary Kathryn hugged her tightly and began to cry
softly.
The Fellowship walked back to the parish
hall and, when we got there, Gertie met us. "Fr. Tom has gone to the hospital.
Matt, Greywolf and Yong Jin went to tell Jens and Gabrielle. Millie is on
her way over. I suggest you go into the conference room and wait for her.
I put some drinks in there for you. Anything else I can do?"
"Gertie, could you call Gladys and
Chelsea? Please?" Matt asked.
"Didn't need to. They called here.
Someone from the hospital had called them about possible emergency duty.
They resigned last week, you know, because the hospice is opening next week.
They are coming by here to see how you all are doing."
When Gladys and Chelsea arrived, there
were hugs and introductions since they didn't really know all the Fellowship.
"Hatred strikes again. When will it end?" Chelsea asked. "But right now I
guess you are wondering where things stand. I know you've been through a
lot and I wouldn't dare try to lie to you. Michael is in a critical condition.
He has lost a tremendous amount of blood because the cuts were deep. While
it is fortunate no vital organ was cut, his bowel was nicked. That means
there is a grave danger of serious, and I mean very serious, infection. Mary
Kathryn, I hope his beautiful face can be repaired, but it was slashed deeply.
We were told a plastic surgeon was being flown in by helicopter from Lexington,
but what the outcome will be is very much up in the air. Right now the important
thing is to keep him alive. And I'll not try to sugar coat it--that is not
going to be easy." Mary Kathryn turned snow white and collapsed.
Chelsea and Gladys soon had her conscious
again. "I'm sorry. I didn't mean to make trouble," she said, then started
crying. Then, as she had done when she was a very young child, she crawled
in my lap and put her arms around my neck. I held her close.
"Chelsea and I resigned from the hospital
last week in anticipation of opening the hospice next week, but it was only
a formal opening since we are not really ready for patients yet. We have
told the hospital we will be doing private duty nursing pulling twelve-hour
shifts to take care of Michael."
"Then," Matt said to Mary Kathryn,
"you can be sure Michael will have the best possible chance of making it.
Death has to get permission before he takes someone from these two."
Time dragged on as it does when you
are waiting, not knowing what is happening. Bill, Linda and Jacob excused
themselves saying they would be in the office for a short time.
When they returned, Bill said, "We
got the ball rolling for Independence to hold a vigil outside the hospital.
There will be students there around the clock until Michael is out of danger.
The first group is going there now. Linda, Paula, Jacob and I are going to
the hospital as part of the first group holding the vigil," Bill said.
"We'll take Mary Kathryn and stay,"
Gladys said "and we'll keep you posted on anything we learn. Let's go, Mary
Kathryn."
Matt and I sat silent for a few minutes
then Matt got up and said, "Luke, I'm going into the church for a while before
we go to the hospital". I followed him, as did Larry and Eugene. The four
of us walked down the hall to the church, holding hands, saying nothing.
When we reached the church, we went to the altar rail and knelt. We stayed
for a good while. When we got up and walked back to the parish office, Millie
was talking to Gertie. Both were crying. It seemed strange to see Millie
crying. It just was so out of character.
"Matt, Luke, Larry, Son," she said
through tears, "I feel terrible. Somehow or other I feel as though I am responsible
for this."
"Millie, that's exactly how I feel.
Had I not kissed Luke..."
"Or if I had not painted that picture..."
"Stop it all, all of you!" Gertie said.
"No-one except the boy who did it and his henchmen are responsible. How could
you have known that he would do such a horrible thing? If we all didn't do
things out of fear of what someone else might do, we'd never do anything.
What you three did was wonderful and shows the world what love is about.
That angry young man showed what hate can do. We can't stop doing things
because there's hate in the world!"
"I know you four want to get to the
hospital although I doubt there will be any news for a long time. I had just
got the Oberlin people on their way when I heard what had happened. I'm on
my way home to get things set up to make it headquarters until Michael is
out of danger. There'll be food and beds there for all who want or need them,"
Millie said.
The four of us hugged Millie and we
all had another good cry, then we left for the hospital.
Michael
I couldn't believe how interested Shawn
McKay and his three skinhead buddies seemed to be in the exhibition. It was
also strange that their girlfriends were not with them, but standing on the
steps outside. Usually they were attached to the side of their "men" as if
they had been born siamese twins. Not only did the four keep asking me questions,
but also Luke. Every time Luke got a few feet away, one of them would call
to him with a question.
It took them so long to get through
the exhibition that all the other students had gone outside, leaving only
the Fellowship and some of Bill's friends from the basketball team inside.
We were finally ready to go into the fourth gallery, the one with the painting
of Matt. As I always did, I stood back in order to allow those viewing the
painting to receive the full impact of it. Suddenly Shawn McKay reached into
his pocket and pulled out a long knife. Before I knew what was happening,
he slashed the painting. I rushed toward him just as he turned and lunged
at me with the knife. As he did, my world turned red and pain I could not
have imagined took over my entire being. I fell to the floor and it seemed
as though the pain and the red were all of my world. I heard voices at first,
but they soon faded away. As the voices faded, the red started turning to
gray, then black. I was alone and I didn't know where. I was only conscious
of the pain then... nothing except blackness and pain.
Luke
When we got to the hospital, there
were about fifty students outside, standing holding hands, heads bowed. When
we got inside, we found Mary Kathryn, Mom and Dad, and Yong Jin and Greywolf
in a waiting room. "David and Margaret insisted on being in the operating
room," Mom said. "The doctors tried to keep them out, but finally let them
go. We have heard nothing."
Larry and Eugene, Matt and I were standing,
each holding his love. "Matt, if I hadn't done that painting..." I said,
as I felt the tears rolling down my face.
"If I hadn't kissed you in front of
all those students..." Matt said through his tears.
"Stop! Stop that nonsense! You are
not responsible for what happened to Michael. Don't you dare start being
guilty for being in love and letting it show," Larry said. "Don't you dare
get yourself into the trap I fell into. Even though I did something terrible,
I have had to get rid of the guilt. It will eat you alive and for what? It
has been a long, hard struggle for me to finally forgive myself for what
I did to Eugene. Don't you two even start. Don't even start collecting and
holding on to guilt. Shawn McKay attacked Michael--not you two."
"He's right, you know," Jens said.
"I have been down that path and I can tell you, it accomplishes nothing.
You didn't do anything to feel guilty about."
As he was talking, Chelsea came into
the room with David and Margaret. "These two need to be out here. There's
nothing they can do in there except make things harder on the doctors who
are working to save Michael." It was the Chelsea of no nonsense who spoke
and it was easy to see that she was not taking anything off of David and
Margaret.
David sat down with is head in his
hands, weeping while Margaret sat beside him, stroking his hair. "To be honest,"
Margaret said, "it doesn't look good. They have finally got the bleeding
somewhat under control, but Michael lost so much blood, he is barely alive.
The hospital is out of his blood type and no-one wants to try giving him
universal donor blood until it is absolutely necessary."
Chelsea had left the room and when
she returned said, "Dr. Bai... Andrews, there is a whole line of kids waiting
to give blood. Parents are arriving, offering to give blood and to give permission
for their kids to give blood. The lab is flooded. If you are up to it, could
you lend a hand?" Margaret was out of the room like a bullet.
We waited--can anything be more difficult
than waiting in a hospital?
An hour or so later, Gladys appeared.
"There's a bit of good news. There were several people who had the right
blood type and the cross matches are ok. Michael is getting the blood he
needs and seems to be responding to it. He's nowhere close to being out of
the woods, but we no longer have to worry about the blood supply--at least
for now."
"Luke, we haven't offered to give blood,"
Matt said.
"Nor have we," Eugene said.
David raised his head and said, "Larry,
Eugene, I don't want to hurt you, but one of the questions you will be asked
is whether or not you have had sex with a man. Eugene, it is known that you
have--without your consent--so your blood will not be accepted."
"Neither will mine," Larry said, hanging
his head.
"There's nothing to be ashamed of,"
David said, "it's a precaution which, in your case I am sure is unnecessary,
but there is no need for you to have to be subject to the questions and refused.
You have my heartfelt thanks for your willingness to give blood."
Matt and I went out and joined the
line of those waiting to give blood and Larry and Eugene joined the vigil.
The hospital was taking blood from
all who offered, but the supply for Michael was still very small. Why didn't
he have a common blood type?
When Matt and I reached the nurse doing
the forms, she asked if we had had sex with a man in the past two years.
When we both answered "No," she looked up in surprise. "I guess you now see
how a stupid assumption--which apparently you had--can hurt and maybe kill,"
Matt said through clinched teeth. I thought she would apologize, but she
didn't.
When we took our forms to the next
person, he said, "There seems to be some question about your giving blood.
I'll need to check this". As he got up to leave, Margaret came out of the
lab. "Dr. Bailey--I mean Andrews, would you check these forms please?"
As soon as Margaret looked at them,
I could see steam coming out of her ears. In a cold, calm voice she said,
"They have my clearance". Then, after signing the forms, she walked over
to the woman who had questioned us and said, "Come with me!" When Margaret
came back, the woman was no longer with her and someone else took over her
job.
Neither Matt nor I had the right blood
type, but we donated blood nevertheless. After we had sat for the required
length of time, we walked back to the waiting room, drinking our OJ. Chelsea
was there. "Good to see you two. I have news which I was just about to tell
everyone. The bleeding is under control and the surgeons are doing the repairs.
There was some leakage from the bowel, so there is still a danger of a major
infection. Fortunately, Michael appears to have no allergies to antibiotics
and the IV antibiotics have been started. After the doctors got the bleeding
from the cut on his face stopped, they did nothing else, waiting for the
plastic surgeon from Lexington to arrive. He is here, but hasn't started
work yet because the other wounds are more critical. There will probably
be no more news for an hour or so if you want to stretch your legs or whatever.
Also, Gladys and I are making reports to Millie's place and to the students
outside."
Matt and I decided to go see and thank
the students. Outside it was obvious that most of those holding the vigil
had given blood because they had the telltale bandaid. Others got up when
students returned from giving blood and went to give theirs. As soon as we
were outside, the members of the Fellowship came over. "Chelsea and Gladys
have kept us informed," Bill said. "It looks a bit brighter than I expected.
When I saw Michael lying in that pool of blood, I thought he was already
dead. Thank God, I was wrong."
We talked about what had happened and,
once again, Matt and I were chided for taking blame. "I have told everyone
my house is headquarters until Michael is out of danger," Eugene said. "Millie
is sending over sandwiches and drinks for those participating in the vigil.
Mr. Stephenson and Uncle Michael came by to offer food and beds to any who
wanted them during the night."
When we went back into the hospital
waiting room, there was no more news. We sat, waiting with David, Mom and
Dad, and Yong Jin and Greywolf. After another hour or so, Dr. Walker came
down the hall to the waiting room. He did not look at all happy. "I'm afraid
I have some bad news. Michael has taken a turn for the worse. The doctors
have done all they can do, but I'm afraid... I'm afraid we are going to lose
Michael. I'm very sorry. Everything seemed to be going so well and the plastic
surgeon was ready to start work on his face when everything seemed to go
wrong. No-one is sure why, but it looks bad, very bad."
Suddenly I had the strangest feeling--I
don't mean from the news. It was hard to describe. I looked at Matt and saw
a very strange look in his eyes as though he was feeling something as well.
In a voice I hardly recognized as Matt's he said, "Dr. Walker, Luke and I
need to go to Michael".
"You know that cannot be... well, that
is very irregular Matt but I have seen you perform a miracle before and,
frankly, there is nothing else we can do. Come with me." He led us down the
hall and into the operating room where there were several doctors standing,
looking at Michael and the monitors. "Doctors, this is Matthew Greywolf and
Luke Larsen. Had Matt not performed what I consider a miracle, Luke would
no longer be with us. They have asked to come here and I see no reason not
to permit it. Guys, get washed up and the nurses will provide you with gloves,
gowns and masks."
As we were washing up, I asked Matt,
"Matt, what are we doing? Why are we here?"
"I don't know, Luke. I simply don't
know, but when Dr. Walker was talking, I had the strangest feeling and felt
like you and I had to go to Michael." I didn't answer, but I knew what he
meant.
When we went back into the operating
room, the doctors watched as we moved toward Michael. Of course he was hooked
up to all kinds of things, his face had a compress on it and he looked dead.
Purely and simply, he looked dead. Matt walked to the other side of the operating
table and when he did, took off the gloves the nurse had given him. I followed
suit. Two doctors started toward us, but Dr. Walker held them back. Matt
touched Michael's left foot with his hand and placed his other hand on the
side of Michael's head. As he did, he looked as though an electric charge
had passed through his body. I had no idea what was going on, but again followed
suit. I couldn't believe how cold Michael's foot was when I touched it with
my hand. As my other hand approached his head, I felt as though something
was flowing through me and into Michael. I could feel myself growing weaker
as the flow continued. I closed my eyes, concentrating on--what?--I didn't
know. Gradually I began to feel pain and my world was turning red... then...
nothing. The next thing I knew, I was on a gurney with Gladys standing over
me. "What happened?" I asked.
"I'm sure I don't know," she replied.
"You and Matt went into the operating room with Dr. Walker and then you were
wheeled out on gurneys, unconscious."
"Matt?"
"He's with Chelsea right over there.
I think he's coming around too. I don't know whether it was the blood you
gave--that shouldn't have made any difference--or the sight of Michael, or
what, but apparently you two fainted. You haven't eaten all day, have you?"
I shook my head, but I knew that wasn't the reason for our passing out. "Now
just lie still for a while. You seem to be ok, but I don't want you passing
out on me. We've got to get some food into you soon."
I was very tired and sleepy and slowly
drifted off to sleep. As I did, I felt the pain again and my world turned
red as it had done when I touched Michael, but it was not as bad.
Michael
I didn't know where I was or what was
happening. All my world was red and smoke and pain--horrible, terrible pain.
More than anything, I wanted to be out of pain. I wanted the darkness of
the smoke to cover me and take away the pain. Slowly, beginning at my feet,
the smoke covered me. It seemed to be entering my body, replacing it. As
it did, the pain went away. Soon it would be over, the pain would be gone.
Soon, soon, please soon. As the smoke whirled around me, it covered, then
entered my stomach where the pain was terrible and the pain went away. "Please,
take it all away," I cried to myself, for I was alone. Just before the pain
completely vanished and I drifted into the smoke to sleep, I felt a presence--no,
there were two--approaching. They wanted to bring the pain back! I tried
to scream, but it was like a nightmare; I could make no sound. "Please go
away! Take the pain away!" I wanted to cry, but no sound came.
Suddenly, the presences I had felt
approaching reached out and touched me. There was a blinding flash of light
and in it I saw Matt and Luke, dressed as Lakota medicine men, reaching out
and touching me. Again and again, lightening bolts came from their hands
and ripped through my body. The pain was terrible! With each lightening bolt,
Matt and Luke became smaller until, finally, they disappeared, leaving me
in body-wracking pain. The smoke was gone and, as it disappeared, I saw Mary
Kathryn, holding our son out to me. Then nothing.
Matt
As I had told Luke, I didn't know why
we needed to go to the operating room or what we were to do when we got there,
but I knew we had to go. When we were all properly prepared, we approached
the operating table where Michael lay. Without thinking--how would I know
what to think?--I took off the gloves that covered my hands and Luke did
likewise. When we touched Michael, I felt as though a tremendous lightening
bolt shot through my body and into Michael's. As I continued to hold his
foot and with my hand to the side of his head, the lightening bolts continued,
each one leaving me in greater pain and definitely weaker. Energy or something
was leaving my body and being replaced by pain--horrible, terrible pain.
Everything turned red. I saw nothing except red--the red of blood. It seemed
as though blood was pouring over me, covering my eyes until all I could see
or imagine was blood, red blood, and all I could feel was pain. I felt myself
growing weaker and weaker, then nothing.
When I came to, I was lying on a gurney
outside the operating room with Chelsea standing over me. "Here, drink this,"
she said, handing me a cup. I was almost too weak to raise up so she placed
a hand behind my head and lifted it from the pillow and held the cup to my
lips. When I had drunk the liquid, I lay back down, exhausted. As I drifted
off to sleep, I saw that red world again and felt the pain, but it wasn't
as bad as it had been when I touched Michael.
When I waked up, Luke was half sitting,
half lying on the gurney beside me. He bent over and kissed me softly as
he whispered, "Sarang Hanun Pomul, what happened in there?"
"Yonghon Tongmu, I wish I knew what
and how and why, but I don't. I don't know anything about it. I just knew
we had to do it."
"Well, I see you're awake now, Matt.
What happened?" Gladys asked.
"As I just said to Luke, I don't know
what or how or why anything happened except I knew we had to go to Michael.
Is there any news?"
"Nothing since you went in. Wait a
minute, here comes Dr. Walker now with the chief surgeon."
"Matt, Luke, I don't know what went
on in there..."
"Neither do we," Luke and I said at
the same time.
"Well, maybe we will know something
later, but I suspect not. By the way, this is Dr. Martinez, the surgeon who
was working on Michael."
We shook hands as Dr. Walker said,
"I have told Dr. Martinez about how you pulled Luke out of the grave and
he wanted to meet you".
"Matt, Luke, I have been witness to
some strange things in my life, but I think your--what?-- performance in
the operating room has to be one of the strangest. I would hate for my colleagues
to hear me say it--they would laugh me out of town--but as soon as you two
touched Michael, I saw a strange light pass from you to him. I don't know
what was going on, but I will tell you that, while he is not out of danger
by a long shot--he is still in very very critical condition--there is hope,
and reason for hope. It was very strange to see you two pass out as he grew
stronger. He is almost--almost--stable. If he stays as stable as he is, I
think the plastic surgeon will risk working on his face. If Michael is stable
enough--and that's still a big if--I only hope he can do a decent job because
the cut is deep and I'm afraid it damaged some nerves--but the major thing
is that Michael live. Now he may make it. I'd just like to know what you
did."
"So would we," Luke said quietly.
Dr. Martinez, once again, said how
puzzled he was and he and Dr. Walker went back to the operating room.
"Chelsea, these two have eaten nothing
today. They shouldn't have given blood in their condition, but I think we
need to order them to go home--or to Millie's--and get some food and rest,"
Gladys said. "I promise we will call you if there is any news at all."
Chelsea said, "I think we need to get
the family to go as well, at least to eat".
Well, who can deny Chelsea AND Gladys?
The Fellowship was gathered together and joined by the family. "We're going
to Millie's for food and a bit of rest," Jens said. "I think you and Margaret
should come as well." David refused.
Margaret was determined to stay with
him until Yong Jin took her in hand. "You have been working like a dog and
I know you haven't gotten any rest or food. You're coming with us."
"I am not leaving David here alone
with our son," she said most emphatically. "Our son," she had said. I guess
you can plan not to be a mom to someone, but then you find out you are.
"Margaret, for the sake of yourself
and your twins, at least take long enough to put your feet up for a few minutes
and get some food. I'll stay with David," Jens said. She was reluctant to
leave but, after a soft kiss from David, which turned quite passionate, she
left with us.
After we had eaten and Margaret had
relaxed as well as she could for half an hour--at least she put her feet
up and, when she did, I noticed they were swollen from the hours she had
been standing and walking--she was determined to go back to the hospital.
Greywolf took her. The rest of us were sprawled out on chairs and on the
floor in the living room. There was very little being said--I am sure all
of us were buried in our own thoughts.
Mary Kathryn
I was glad I was surrounded by people
who cared about me and about the love of my life Michael. They all loved
Michael for sure, but I didn't just love Michael. Michael was my very life.
My every heartbeat was because Michael loved me. And now... well, there was
hope, but... I don't think I could live without Michael and his love. I felt
myself slowly sinking into hopelessness as I thought about life without my
man. There would be no life without him. I could feel tears forming again--I
thought I had long ago cried until there were no more tears.
Luke must have noticed because he got
up from where he was sitting between Matt's legs and walked over to me and
put his arms about me. "Sis, Michael will make it. Remember, you and he had
a son. Just remember that. A dead man does not father children. Michael will
make it. I know it." As he gave me a hard Luke squeeze, Millie came into
the room with a tray of sandwiches and drinks. We had eaten only a short
time before but teens are always hungry, I guess, and all of us had missed
lunch.
"I'm taking this into the library,"
she said. "There has just been an announcement from WLEX that a student had
been attacked in Concord today and LaTasha Jackson was on the way to cover
the story. You know the rest, 'Film at 11:00'. It's 10:30 now so you may
want to go upstairs to Eugene's to watch or come into the library with me."
"Millie," Luke said, "I know we're
supposed to be adults and I'm sure you suggested Eugene's place thinking
we might like to be alone--alone together I mean--but, to tell the truth,
I don't feel too adult right now and would like a mom around." Heads nodded
all around.
Millie got misty eyed as she said,
"Luke, I have never been more honored".
As we started to the library, the doorbell
rang. When Millie went to the door, she came back with Uncle Michael. "I
left John to take care of the students coming over from the vigil," he said.
"When I heard WLEX was doing a report tonight, I felt I should be here with
you since the parents are at the hospital." Before he had finished speaking,
he was being hugged by the whole group.
As we got settled with the sandwiches
and drinks, waiting for the news, the phone rang. Everyone froze. I guess
in such situations, you always expect the worst. Millie answered the phone
and her whole body relaxed almost immediately but, just as quickly, it became
rigid as she got a stricken look on her face.
Part Thirty-seven
Mary Kathryn
As soon as I saw the look on Millie's
face, I knew the worst had happened. I supposed I would have burst into tears,
but I guess I had already cried myself out. I stood, stunned, waiting for
the words which would end my life.
Millie hung up the phone, turned to
all of us who were waiting for the bad news. "I guess our news today comes
as good news, bad news. The good news--the very good news--is that Michael
has stabilized and the bleeding has been stopped. The plastic surgeon has
started working on his face. Dr. Walker came out and told David and Margaret
that he was very confident that Michael would live. He told them without
the blood students and parents had given, he would not have. Now the bad
news. Michael will carry a scar on his face for the rest of his life according
to the plastic surgeon. He thinks it might not be too bad and, if it is,
additional reconstructive surgery can be done when he is well. But, and this
is the bad news. He is certain the slash to Michael's face caused nerve damage.
Nerve damage cannot be repaired. This means there will be facial paralysis.
He is not sure how much--it may be very bad or not so bad. Exactly how much
damage has been done and how much paralysis there will be will not be evident
for sometime. Michael is, of course, still under anesthesia and won't be
conscious for some time. Even then he will be heavily sedated."
"But he is out of danger?" I asked.
"He will live?"
"Well, he's still in a very critical
condition, but there is real hope that he will make it. Dr. Walker is not
one for undue optimism and he is very optimistic at this point. Every time
I think about how a jackass damaged Michael's beautiful face I get so angry
I am ready to strangle the son of a bitch with my bare hands. I keep thinking
we will never see that famous Michael smile again," Millie said.
"Well, at least he will be with us,"
Luke said. "I didn't think he would make it when I saw him lying there on
the floor. But I am so angry, so very, very angry."
We were all very silent for a time,
then Eugene asked, "Millie, what will happen to those who did this to Michael?
Surely they won't get away with it."
"I'm not sure exactly what will happen.
But I can assure you that they will not get away with it as long as I have
money and lawyers--if that's what it takes to make sure they don't. My poor
Michael's beautiful face and smile..."
"But he'll still be Michael--and my
man. So long as I have him, I don't care how he looks. I mean, I wish his
face hadn't been cut. I wish he hadn't been cut. I wish he didn't have to
suffer as I know he is, but he was cut and it looks as if he may live. That's
all I ask, 'Let him live! Let him live!'"
"Holy shit," Luke said, then everyone
became very quiet since we all--I'm sure--thought of Michael. I felt tears
welling up. "There is hope--real hope--that Michael will live. That's all
I want. Sure, I wish his face won't be scarred--he